USRE44186E1 - Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method - Google Patents

Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
USRE44186E1
USRE44186E1 US13/308,658 US201113308658A USRE44186E US RE44186 E1 USRE44186 E1 US RE44186E1 US 201113308658 A US201113308658 A US 201113308658A US RE44186 E USRE44186 E US RE44186E
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
compound
inhibitor
agent
mmol
pharmaceutically acceptable
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Expired - Lifetime, expires
Application number
US13/308,658
Inventor
Jeffrey A. Robl
Richard B. Sulsky
David J. Augeri
David R. Magnin
Lawrence G. Hamann
David A. Betebenner
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
AstraZeneca AB
Original Assignee
Bristol Myers Squibb Co
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Family has litigation
First worldwide family litigation filed litigation Critical https://patents.darts-ip.com/?family=22693638&utm_source=google_patent&utm_medium=platform_link&utm_campaign=public_patent_search&patent=USRE44186(E1) "Global patent litigation dataset” by Darts-ip is licensed under a Creative Commons Attribution 4.0 International License.
Application filed by Bristol Myers Squibb Co filed Critical Bristol Myers Squibb Co
Priority to US13/308,658 priority Critical patent/USRE44186E1/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of USRE44186E1 publication Critical patent/USRE44186E1/en
Assigned to ASTRAZENECA AB reassignment ASTRAZENECA AB ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST (SEE DOCUMENT FOR DETAILS). Assignors: BRISTOL-MYERS SQUIBB COMPANY
Assigned to ASTRAZENECA AB reassignment ASTRAZENECA AB CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE ADDRESS PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 032541 FRAME 0698. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ADDRESS OF THE ASSIGNEE SHOULD BE SE-151 85, SODERTALJE, SWEDEN. Assignors: BRISTOL-MYERS SQUIBB COMPANY
Adjusted expiration legal-status Critical
Expired - Lifetime legal-status Critical Current

Links

Classifications

    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C271/00Derivatives of carbamic acids, i.e. compounds containing any of the groups, the nitrogen atom not being part of nitro or nitroso groups
    • C07C271/06Esters of carbamic acids
    • C07C271/08Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C07C271/10Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms with the nitrogen atoms of the carbamate groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms
    • C07C271/22Esters of carbamic acids having oxygen atoms of carbamate groups bound to acyclic carbon atoms with the nitrogen atoms of the carbamate groups bound to hydrogen atoms or to acyclic carbon atoms to carbon atoms of hydrocarbon radicals substituted by carboxyl groups
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61KPREPARATIONS FOR MEDICAL, DENTAL OR TOILETRY PURPOSES
    • A61K31/00Medicinal preparations containing organic active ingredients
    • A61K31/33Heterocyclic compounds
    • A61K31/395Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins
    • A61K31/40Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil
    • A61K31/403Heterocyclic compounds having nitrogen as a ring hetero atom, e.g. guanethidine or rifamycins having five-membered rings with one nitrogen as the only ring hetero atom, e.g. sulpiride, succinimide, tolmetin, buflomedil condensed with carbocyclic rings, e.g. carbazole
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P1/00Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system
    • A61P1/04Drugs for disorders of the alimentary tract or the digestive system for ulcers, gastritis or reflux esophagitis, e.g. antacids, inhibitors of acid secretion, mucosal protectants
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P15/00Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives
    • A61P15/08Drugs for genital or sexual disorders; Contraceptives for gonadal disorders or for enhancing fertility, e.g. inducers of ovulation or of spermatogenesis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/02Drugs for skeletal disorders for joint disorders, e.g. arthritis, arthrosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P19/00Drugs for skeletal disorders
    • A61P19/08Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease
    • A61P19/10Drugs for skeletal disorders for bone diseases, e.g. rachitism, Paget's disease for osteoporosis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P25/00Drugs for disorders of the nervous system
    • A61P25/18Antipsychotics, i.e. neuroleptics; Drugs for mania or schizophrenia
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P29/00Non-central analgesic, antipyretic or antiinflammatory agents, e.g. antirheumatic agents; Non-steroidal antiinflammatory drugs [NSAID]
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/04Anorexiants; Antiobesity agents
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/06Antihyperlipidemics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P3/00Drugs for disorders of the metabolism
    • A61P3/08Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis
    • A61P3/10Drugs for disorders of the metabolism for glucose homeostasis for hyperglycaemia, e.g. antidiabetics
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P31/00Antiinfectives, i.e. antibiotics, antiseptics, chemotherapeutics
    • A61P31/12Antivirals
    • A61P31/14Antivirals for RNA viruses
    • A61P31/18Antivirals for RNA viruses for HIV
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P37/00Drugs for immunological or allergic disorders
    • A61P37/02Immunomodulators
    • A61P37/06Immunosuppressants, e.g. drugs for graft rejection
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P43/00Drugs for specific purposes, not provided for in groups A61P1/00-A61P41/00
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/06Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the anterior pituitary hormones, e.g. TSH, ACTH, FSH, LH, PRL, GH
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P5/00Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system
    • A61P5/48Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones
    • A61P5/50Drugs for disorders of the endocrine system of the pancreatic hormones for increasing or potentiating the activity of insulin
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61PSPECIFIC THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY OF CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS OR MEDICINAL PREPARATIONS
    • A61P9/00Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system
    • A61P9/10Drugs for disorders of the cardiovascular system for treating ischaemic or atherosclerotic diseases, e.g. antianginal drugs, coronary vasodilators, drugs for myocardial infarction, retinopathy, cerebrovascula insufficiency, renal arteriosclerosis
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D209/00Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom
    • C07D209/02Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring
    • C07D209/52Heterocyclic compounds containing five-membered rings, condensed with other rings, with one nitrogen atom as the only ring hetero atom condensed with one carbocyclic ring condensed with a ring other than six-membered
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D401/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom
    • C07D401/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings
    • C07D401/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, at least one ring being a six-membered ring with only one nitrogen atom containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07DHETEROCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07D403/00Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00
    • C07D403/02Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings
    • C07D403/06Heterocyclic compounds containing two or more hetero rings, having nitrogen atoms as the only ring hetero atoms, not provided for by group C07D401/00 containing two hetero rings linked by a carbon chain containing only aliphatic carbon atoms
    • CCHEMISTRY; METALLURGY
    • C07ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
    • C07CACYCLIC OR CARBOCYCLIC COMPOUNDS
    • C07C2603/00Systems containing at least three condensed rings
    • C07C2603/56Ring systems containing bridged rings
    • C07C2603/58Ring systems containing bridged rings containing three rings
    • C07C2603/70Ring systems containing bridged rings containing three rings containing only six-membered rings
    • C07C2603/74Adamantanes

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-4), and to a method for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, diabetic complications, hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as various immunomodulatory diseases and chronic inflammatory bowel disease, employing such cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidines alone or in combination with another type antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent.
  • diabetes especially Type II diabetes, as well as hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, diabetic complications, hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as various immunomodulatory diseases and chronic inflammatory bowel disease
  • Depeptidyl peptidase IV is a membrane bound non-classical serine aminodipeptidase which is located in a variety of tissues (intestine, liver, lung, kidney) as well as on circulating T-lymphocytes (where the enzyme is known as CD-26). It is responsible for the metabolic cleavage of certain endogenous peptides (GLP-1(7-36), glucagon) in vivo and has demonstrated proteolytic activity against a variety of other peptides (GHRH, NPY, GLP-2, VIP) in vitro.
  • GLP-1(7-36) is a 29 amino-acid peptide derived by post-translational processing of proglucagon in the small intestine.
  • GLP-1(7-36) has multiple actions in vivo including the stimulation of insulin secretion, inhibition of glucagon secretion, the promotion of satiety, and the slowing of gastric emptying. Based on its physiological profile, the actions of GLP-1(7-36) are expected to be beneficial in the prevention and treatment of type II diabetes and potentially obesity.
  • exogenous administration of GLP-1(7-36) continuously infusion in diabetic patients has demonstrated efficacy in this patient population.
  • GLP-1(7-36) is degraded rapidly in vivo and has been shown to have a short half-life in vivo (t1/2 ⁇ 1.5 min). Based on a study of genetically bred DP-4 KO mice and on in vivo/in vitro studies with selective DP-4 inhibitors, DP-4 has been shown to be the primary degrading enzyme of GLP-1(7-36) in vivo. GLP-1(7-36) is degraded by DP-4 efficiently to GLP-1(9-36), which has been speculated to act as a physiological antagonist to GLP-1(7-36). Thus, inhibition of DP-4 in vivo should potentiate endogenous levels of GLP-1(7-36) and attenuate formation of its antagonist GLP-1(9-36) and thus serve to ameliorate the diabetic condition.
  • cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based compounds which inhibit DP-4 and have the structure
  • a method for treating diabetes especially Type II diabetes, as well as impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplantation, autoimmune diseases (such as scleroderma and multiple sclerosis), various immunomodulatory diseases (such as lupus erythematosis or psoriasis), AIDS, intestinal diseases (such as necrotizing enteritis, microvillus inclusion disease or celiac disease), inflammatory bowel syndrome, chemotherapy-induced intestinal mucosal atrophy or injury, anorexia nervosa, osteoporosis, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as inflammatory bowel disease (such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis), wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of structure I (which inhibits DP 4)
  • a method for treating diabetes and related diseases as defined above and hereinafter as well as any of the other disease states mentioned above, wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a combination of a compound of structure I and one, two, three or more of other types of antidiabetic agent(s) (which may be employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one, two or three or more other types of therapeutic agent(s) is administered to a human patient in need of treatment.
  • diabetes and related diseases refers to Type II diabetes, Type I diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, obesity, hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, dysmetabolic syndrome, and hyperinsulinemia.
  • diabetes complications include retinopathy, neuropathy and nephropathy, and other known complications of diabetes.
  • other type(s) of therapeutic agents refers to one or more antidiabetic agents (other than DP4 inhibitors of formula I), one or more anti-obesity agents, and/or one or more lipid-modulating agents (including anti-atherosclerosis agents), and/or one or more infertility agents, one or more agents for treating polycystic ovary syndrome, one or more agents for treating growth disorders, one or more agents for treating frailty, one or more agents for treating arthritis, one or more agents for preventing allograft rejection in transplantation, one or more agents for treating autoimmune diseases, one or more anti-AIDS agents, one or more anti-osteoporosis agents, one or more agents for treating immunomodulatory diseases, one or more agents for treating chronic inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome and/or one or more agents for treating anorexia nervosa.
  • lipid-modulating agent refers to agents which lower LDL and/or raise HDL and/or lower triglycerides and/or lower total cholesterol and/or other known mechanisms for therapeutically treating lipid disorders.
  • the compound of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the antidiabetic agent or other type therapeutic agent (depending upon its mode of operation) within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 500:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 100:1, more preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 10:1.
  • R 3 is H or alkyl
  • R 1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcyclo alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxytricyclo alkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl
  • R 2 is H or alkyl
  • n is 0,
  • X is CN
  • x is 0 or 1
  • y is 0 or 1.
  • R 1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl or hydroxytricycloalkyl;
  • R 1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl as well as the following:
  • compound 1 where PG 1 is a common amine protecting group such as Boc, Cbz, or FMOC and X 1 is H or CO 2 R 9 as set out below, may be generated by methods as described herein or in the literature (for example see Sagnard et al, Tet-Lett., 1995, 36, pp. 3148-3152, Tverezovsky et al, Tetrahedron, 1997, 53, pp. 14773-14792, Hanessian et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1998, 8, p. 2123-2128). Removal of the PG 1 group by conventional methods (e.g.
  • the ester may be hydrolyzed under a variety of conditions, for example with aqueous NaOH in a suitable solvent such as methanol, THF, or dioxane, to provide the acid 5.
  • aqueous NaOH in a suitable solvent such as methanol, THF, or dioxane
  • Conversion of the acid group to the primary carboxamide, affording 6, may be effected by activation of the acid group (e.g. employing i-BuOCOCl/TEA or EDAC) followed by treatment with NH 3 or an ammonia equivalent in a solvent such as dioxane, ether, or methanol.
  • the amide functionality may be converted to the nitrile group by a variety of standard conditions (e.g. POCl 3 /pyridine/imidazole or cyanuric chloride/DMF or trifluoroacetic anhydride, THF, pyridine) to give 7.
  • POCl 3 /pyridine/imidazole or cyanuric chloride/DMF or trifluoroacetic anhydride, THF, pyridine trifluoroacetic anhydride
  • compound 1 where X 1 is CO 2 R 9 may be saponified to the acid and subsequently amidated as described above to give amide 8. Removal of the PG 1 group followed by peptide coupling to 3 affords compound 6, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib.
  • the carboxamide group in 8 may be converted to the nitrile as described above to give compound 9.
  • Deprotection of PG 1 affords 10 which may be subject to standard peptide coupling conditions to afford 7, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib.
  • Compound 10 may also be generated by oxidation of the amine 2 (e.g. NCS) followed by hydrolysis and subsequent cyanide treatment.
  • Compound 10 may be obtained as a mixture of stereoisomers or a single isomer/diastereomer which may be epimerized (employing conventional procedures) to afford a mixture of stereoisomers.
  • ⁇ -amino acids such as
  • lower alkyl as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes both straight and branched chain hydrocarbons, containing 1 to 20 carbons, preferably 1 to 10 carbons, more preferably 1 to 8 carbons, in the normal chain, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, heptyl, 4,4-dimethylpentyl, octyl, 2,2,4-trimethyl-pentyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, the various branched chain isomers thereof, and the like as well as such groups including 1 to 4 substituents such as halo, for example F, Br, Cl or I or CF 3 , alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, ary
  • cycloalkyl as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes saturated or partially unsaturated (containing 1 or 2 double bonds) cyclic hydrocarbon groups containing 1 to 3 rings, including monocyclic alkyl, bicyclic alkyl (or bicycloalkyl) and tricyclic alkyl (tricycloalkyl), containing a total of 3 to 20 carbons forming the ring, preferably 3 to 10 carbons, forming the ring and which may be fused to 1 or 2 aromatic rings as described for aryl, which includes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclodecyl and cyclododecyl, cyclohexenyl, adamantyl,
  • any of which groups may be optionally subsituted with 1 to 4 substituents such as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, oxo, acyl, arylcarbonylamino, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol and/or alkylthio and/or any of the substituents for alkyl.
  • substituents such as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, oxo, acyl, arylcarbonylamino, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol and/or alkylthio and/or any of the substituents for alkyl.
  • cycloalkenyl as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to cyclic hydrocarbons containing 3 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 10 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds.
  • exemplary cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and cycloheptadienyl, which may be optionally substituted as defined for cycloalkyl.
  • cycloalkylene refers to a “cycloalkyl” group which includes free bonds and thus is a linking group such as
  • alkanoyl as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to alkyl linked to a carbonyl group.
  • lower alkenyl or “alkenyl” as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons, and more preferably 1 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one to six double bonds in the normal chain, such as vinyl, 2-propenyl, 3-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 4-pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 2-heptenyl, 3-heptenyl, 4-heptenyl, 3-octenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-decenyl, 3-undecenyl, 4-dodecenyl, 4,8,12-tetradecatrienyl, and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkyn
  • lower alkynyl or “alkynyl” as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons and more preferably 2 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one triple bond in the normal chain, such as 2-propynyl, 3-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 4-pentynyl, 3-pentynyl, 2-hexynyl, 3-hexynyl, 2-heptynyl, 3-heptynyl, 4-heptynyl, 3-octenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-decenyl,3-undecenyl, 4-dodecenyl and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl,
  • arylalkenyl and arylalkynyl as used alone or as part of another group refer to alkenyl and alkynyl groups as described above having an aryl substituent.
  • alkyl groups as defined above have single bonds for attachment to other groups at two different carbon atoms, they are termed “alkylene” groups and may optionally be substituted as defined above for “alkyl”.
  • alkenyl groups as defined above and alkynyl groups as defined above, respectively, have single bonds for attachment at two different carbon atoms, they are termed “alkenylene groups” and “alkynylene groups”, respectively, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for “alkenyl” and “alkynyl”.
  • halogen or “halo” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to chlorine, bromine, fluorine, and iodine as well as CF 3 , with chlorine or fluorine being preferred.
  • metal ion refers to alkali metal ions such as sodium, potassium or lithium and alkaline earth metal ions such as magnesium and calcium, as well as zinc and aluminum.
  • aryl refers to monocyclic and bicyclic aromatic groups containing 6 to 10 carbons in the ring portion (such as phenyl or naphthyl including 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl) and may optionally include one to three additional rings fused to a carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring (such as aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl rings for example
  • lower alkoxy as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to an oxygen atom.
  • substituted amino refers to amino substituted with one or two substituents, which may be the same or different, such as alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl or thioalkyl. These substituents may be further substituted with any of the R 1 groups or substituents for R 1 as set out above.
  • amino substituents may be taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 1-azepinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-thiamorpholinyl, 1-piperazinyl, 4-alkyl-1-piperazinyl, 4-arylalkyl-1-piperazinyl, 4-diarylalkyl-1-piperazinyl, 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, or 1-azepinyl, optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, trifluoromethyl or hydroxy.
  • lower alkylthio as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to a sulfur atom.
  • lower alkylamino as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl groups linked to a nitrogen atom.
  • acyl as employed herein by itself or part of another group, as defined herein, refers to an organic radical linked to a carbonyl
  • acyl groups include any of the R 1 groups attached to a carbonyl, such as alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaroyl, cycloalkanoyl, cycloheteroalkanoyl and the like.
  • cycloheteroalkyl refers to a 5-, 6- or 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring which includes 1 to 2 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen and/or sulfur, linked through a carbon atom or a heteroatom, where possible, optionally via the linker (CH 2 ) r (where r is 1, 2 or 3), such as:
  • any of the cycloheteroalkyl rings can be fused to a cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring.
  • heteroaryl refers to a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring which includes 1, 2, 3 or 4 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, and such rings fused to an aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring (e.g. benzothiophenyl, indolyl), and includes possible N-oxides.
  • the heteroaryl group may optionally include 1 to 4 substituents such as any of the substituents set out above for alkyl. Examples of heteroaryl groups include the following:
  • cycloheteroalkylalkyl as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to cycloheteroalkyl groups as defined above linked through a C atom or heteroatom to a (CH 2 ) r chain.
  • heteroarylalkyl or “heteroarylalkenyl” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a heteroaryl group as defined above linked through a C atom or heteroatom to a —(CH 2 ) r — chain, alkylene or alkenylene as defined above.
  • polyhaloalkyl refers to an “alkyl” group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF 3 CH 2 , CF 3 or CF 3 CF 2 CH 2 .
  • polyhaloalkoxy refers to an “alkoxy” or “alkyloxy” group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF 3 CH 2 O, CF 3 O or CF 3 CF 2 CH 2 O.
  • All stereoisomers of the compounds of the instant invention are contemplated, either in admixture or in pure or substantially pure form.
  • the compounds of the present invention can have asymmetric centers at any of the carbon atoms including any one or the R substituents. Consequently, compounds of formula I can exist in enantiomeric or diastereomeric forms or in mixtures thereof.
  • the processes for preparation can utilize racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting materials. When diastereomeric or enantiomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
  • the compounds of structure I may be used in combination with one or more other types of antidiabetic agents (employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one or more other types of therapeutic agents which may be administered orally in the same dosage form, in a separate oral dosage form or by injection.
  • the other type of antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be 1,2,3 or more antidiabetic agents or antihyperglycemic agents including insulin secretagogues or insulin sensitizers, or other antidiabetic agents preferably having a mechanism of action different from DP4 inhibition and may include biguanides, sulfonyl ureas, glucosidase inhibitors, PPAR ⁇ agonists, such as thiazolidinediones, SGLT2 inhibitors, PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonists, aP2 inhibitors, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, advanced glycosylation end (AGE) products inhibitors, and/or meglitinides, as well as insulin, and/or glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) or mimetics thereof.
  • biguanides such as thiazolidinediones, SGLT2 inhibitors, PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual
  • the other antidiabetic agent may be an oral antihyperglycemic agent preferably a biguanide such as metformin or phenformin or salts thereof, preferably metformin HCl.
  • the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to biguanide within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 5:1.
  • the other antidiabetic agent may also preferably be a sulfonyl urea such as glyburide (also known as glibenclamide), glimepiride (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,379,785), glipizide, gliclazide or chlorpropamide, other known sulfonylureas or other antihyperglycemic agents which act on the ATP-dependent channel of the ⁇ -cells, with glyburide and glipizide being preferred, which may be administered in the same or in separate oral dosage forms.
  • glyburide also known as glibenclamide
  • glimepiride also known as glimepiride
  • glipizide also known as gliclazide
  • chlorpropamide other known sulfonylureas or other antihyperglycemic agents which act on the ATP-dependent channel of the ⁇ -cells
  • glyburide and glipizide
  • the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the sulfonyl urea in the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.05:1 to about 5:1.
  • the oral antidiabetic agent may also be a glucosidase inhibitor such as acarbose (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,904,769) or miglitol (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,639,436), which may be administered in the same or in a separate oral dosage forms.
  • acarbose disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,904,769
  • miglitol disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,639,436
  • the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the glucosidase inhibitor within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 50:1.
  • the compounds of structure I may be employed in combination with a PPAR ⁇ agonist such as a thiazolidinedione oral anti-diabetic agent or other insulin sensitizers (which has an insulin sensitivity effect in NIDDM patients) such as troglitazone (Warner-Lambert's Rezulin®, disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,572,912), rosiglitazone (en), pioglitazone (Takeda), Mitsubishi MCC-555 (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • a PPAR ⁇ agonist such as a thiazolidinedione oral anti-diabetic agent or other insulin sensitizers (which has an insulin sensitivity effect in NIDDM patients) such as troglitazone (Warner-Lambert's Rezulin®, disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,572,912), rosiglitazone (en), pioglitazone (Takeda), Mitsubishi MCC
  • Glaxo-Wellcome's GL-262570 englitazone (CP-68722, Pfizer) or darglitazone (CP-86325, Pfizer, isaglitazone (MIT/J&J), JTT-501 (JPNT/P&U), L-895645 (Merck), R-119702 (Sankyo/WL), NN-2344 (Dr. Reddy/NN), or YM-440 (Yamanouchi), preferably rosiglitazone and pioglitazone.
  • the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the thiazolidinedione in an amount within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
  • the sulfonyl urea and thiazolidinedione in amounts of less than about 150 mg oral antidiabetic agent may be incorporated in a single tablet with the compounds of structure I.
  • the compounds of structure I may also be employed in combination with a antihyperglycemic agent such as insulin or with glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) such as GLP-1(1-36) amide, GLP-1(7-36) amide, GLP-1(7-36) (as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,614,492 to Habener, disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference), or a GLP-1 mimic such as AC2993 or Exendin-4 (Amylin) and LY-315902 or LY-307167 (Lilly) and NN2211 (Novo-Nordisk), which may be administered via injection, intranasal, or by transdermal or buccal devices.
  • GLP-1 glucagon-like peptide-1
  • GLP-1 mimic such as AC2993 or Exendin-4 (Amylin) and LY-315902 or LY-307167 (Lilly) and NN2211 (Novo-Nordisk
  • metformin the sulfonyl ureas, such as glyburide, glimepiride, glipyride, glipizide, chlorpropamide and gliclazide and the glucosidase inhibitors acarbose or miglitol or insulin (injectable, pulmonary, buccal, or oral) may be employed in formulations as described above and in amounts and dosing as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference (PDR).
  • PDR Physician's Desk Reference
  • metformin or salt thereof may be employed in amounts within the range from about 500 to about 2000 mg per day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times daily.
  • the thiazolidinedione anti-diabetic agent may be employed in amounts within the range from about 0.01 to about 2000 mg/day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times per day.
  • insulin may be employed in formulations, amounts and dosing as indicated by the Physician's Desk Reference.
  • GLP-1 peptides may be administered in oral buccal formulations, by nasal administration (for example inhalation spray) or parenterally as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,346,701 (TheraTech), 5,614,492 and 5,631,224 which are incorporated herein by reference.
  • the other antidiabetic agent may also be a PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonist such as AR-HO39242 (Astra/Zeneca), GW-409544 (Glaxo-Wellcome), KRP297 (Kyorin Merck) as well as those disclosed by Murakami et al, “A Novel Insulin Sensitizer Acts As a Coligand for Peroxisome Proliferation—Activated Receptor Alpha (PPAR alpha) and PPAR gamma. Effect on PPAR alpha Activation on Abnormal Lipid Metabolism in Liver of Zucker Fatty Rats”, Diabetes 47, 1841-1847 (1998), and in U.S. application Ser. No. 09/664,598, filed Sep. 18, 2000, (attorney file LA29NP) the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, employing dosages as set out therein, which compounds designated as preferred are preferred for use herein.
  • AR-HO39242 Astra/Zeneca
  • GW-409544
  • the other antidiabetic agent may be an SGLT2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. application Ser. No. 09/679,027, filed Oct. 4, 2000 (attorney file LA49NP), which is incorporated herein by reference, employing dosages as set out herein. Preferred are the compounds designated as preferred in the above application.
  • the other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be an aP2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. application Ser. No. 09/391,053, filed Sep. 7, 1999, and U.S. application Ser. No. 09/519,079, filed Mar. 6, 2000 (attorney file LA27NP), which is incorporated herein by reference, employing dosages as set out herein.
  • the other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor such as disclosed in WO 96/39384, WO 96/39385, EP 978279, WO 2000/47206, WO 99/43663, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,952,322 and 5,998,463, WO 99/26659 and EP 1041068.
  • the meglitinide which may optionally be employed in combination with the compound of formula I of the invention may be repaglinide, nateglinide (Novartis) or KAD1229 (PF/Kissei), with repaglinide being preferred.
  • the DP4 inhibitor of formula I will be employed in a weight ratio to the meglitinide, PPAR ⁇ agonist, PPAR ⁇ / ⁇ dual agonist, SGLT2 inhibitor, aP2 inhibitor, or glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
  • the hypolipidemic agent or lipid-modulating agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the compounds of formula I of the invention may include 1,2,3 or more MTP inhibitors, HMG CoA reductase inhibitors, squalene synthetase inhibitors, fibric acid derivatives, ACAT inhibitors, lipoxygenase inhibitors, cholesterol absorption inhibitors, ileal Na + /bile acid cotransporter inhibitors, upregulators of LDL receptor activity, ATP citrate lyase inhibitors, cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors, bile acid sequestrants, and/or nicotinic acid and derivatives thereof.
  • MTP inhibitors employed herein include MTP inhibitors disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,595,872, U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,135, U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,279, U.S. Pat. No. 5,760,246, U.S. Pat. No. 5,827,875, U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,983 and U.S. application Ser. No. 09/175,180 filed Oct. 20, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,440. Preferred are each of the preferred MTP inhibitors disclosed in each of the above patents and applications.
  • MTP inhibitors to be employed in accordance with the present invention include preferred MTP inhibitors as set out in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,739,135 and 5,712,279, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,760,246 as well as implitapide (Bayer).
  • MTP inhibitor 9-[4-[4-[[2-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethoxy)benzoyl]amino]-1-piperidinyl] butyl]-N-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-9H-fluorene-9-carboxamide
  • the hypolipidemic agent may be an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor which includes, but is not limited to, mevastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,983,140, lovastatin (mevinolin) and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,231,938, pravastatin and related compounds such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,346,227, simvastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,448,784 and 4,450,171.
  • HMG CoA reductase inhibitors which may be employed herein include, but are not limited to, fluvastatin, disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • the squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, a-phosphono-sulfonates disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,396, those disclosed by Biller et al, J. Med. Chem., 1988, Vol. 11, No. 10, pp 1869-1871, including isoprenoid (phosphinyl-methyl) phosphonates as well as other known squalene synthetase inhibitors, for example, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,871,721 and 4,924,024 and in Biller, S. A., Neuenschwander, K., Ponpipom, M. M., and Poulter, C. D., Current Pharmaceutical Design, 2, 1-40 (1996).
  • squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include the terpenoid pyrophosphates disclosed by P. Ortiz de Montellano et al, J. Med. Chem., 1977, 20, 243-249, the farnesyl diphosphate analog A and presqualene pyrophosphate (PSQ-PP) analogs as disclosed by Corey and Volante, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1976, 98, 1291-1293, phosphinylphosphonates reported by McClard, R. W. et al, J.A.C.S., 1987, 10, 5544 and cyclopropanes reported by Capson, T. L., PhD dissertation, June, 1987, Dept. Med. Chem. U of Utah, Abstracts Table of Contents, pp 16, 17, 40-43, 48-51, Summary.
  • hypolipidemic agents suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, fibric acid derivatives, such as fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate, bezafibrate, ciprofibrate, clinofibrate and the like, probucol, and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No.
  • bile acid sequestrants such as cholestyramine, colestipol and DEAE-Sephadex (Secholex®, policexide®), as well as lipostabil (Rhone-Poulenc), Eisai E-5050 (an N-substituted ethanolamine derivative), imanixil (HOE-402), tetrahydrolipstatin (THL), istigmastanylphos-phorylcholine (SPC, Roche), aminocyclodextrin (Tanabe Seiyoku), Ajinomoto AJ-814 (azulene derivative), melinamide (Sumitomo), Sandoz 58-035, American Cyanamid CL-277,082 and CL-283,546 (disubstituted urea derivatives), nicotinic acid, acipimox, acifran, neomycin, p-aminosalicylic acid, aspirin
  • the other hypolipidemic agent may be an ACAT inhibitor such as disclosed in, Drugs of the Future 24, 9-15 (1999), (Avasimibe); “The ACAT inhibitor, Cl-1011 is effective in the prevention and regression of aortic fatty streak area in hamsters”, Nicolosi et al, Atherosclerosis (Shannon, Irel). (1998), 137(1), 77-85; “The pharmacological profile of FCE 27677: a novel ACAT inhibitor with potent hypolipidemic activity mediated by selective suppression of the hepatic secretion of ApoB100-containing lipoprotein”, Ghiselli, Giancarlo, Cardiovasc. Drug Rev.
  • the hypolipidemic agent may be an upregulator of LD2 receptor activity such as MD-700 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd) and LY295427 (Eli Lilly).
  • the hypolipidemic agent may be a cholesterol absorption inhibitor preferably Schering-Plough's SCH48461 as well as those disclosed in Atherosclerosis 115, 45-63 (1995) and J. Med. Chem. 41, 973 (1998).
  • the hypolipidemic agent may be an ileal Na + /bile acid cotransporter inhibitor such as disclosed in Drugs of the Future, 24, 425-430 (1999).
  • the lipid-modulating agent may be a cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) inhibitor such as Pfizer's CP 529, 414 (WO/0038722 and EP 818448) and Pharmacia's SC-744 and SC-795.
  • CETP cholesteryl ester transfer protein
  • the ATP citrate lyase inhibitor which may be employed in the combination of the invention may include, for example, those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,447,954.
  • Preferred hypolipidemic agents are pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin, cerivastatin, atavastatin and ZD-4522.
  • the compounds of formula I of the invention will be employed in a weight ratio to the hypolipidemic agent (were present), within the range from about 500:1 to about 1:500, preferably from about 100:1 to about 1:100.
  • the dose administered must be carefully adjusted according to age, weight and condition of the patient, as well as the route of administration, dosage form and regimen and the desired result.
  • the dosages and formulations for the hypolipidemic agent will be as disclosed in the various patents and applications discussed above.
  • the MTP inhibitor for oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing the MTP inhibitor in an amount within the range of from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg and preferably from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg, one to four times daily.
  • a preferred oral dosage form such as tablets or capsules, will contain the MTP inhibitor in an amount of from about 1 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 2 to about 400 mg, and more preferably from about 5 to about 250 mg, one to four times daily.
  • an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor for example, pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin in dosages employed as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference, such as in an amount within the range of from about 1 to 2000 mg, and preferably from about 4 to about 200 mg.
  • the squalene synthetase inhibitor may be employed in dosages in an amount within the range of from about 10 mg to about 2000 mg and preferably from about 25 mg to about 200 mg.
  • a preferred oral dosage form such as tablets or capsules, will contain the HMG CoA reductase inhibitor in an amount from about 0.1 to about 100 mg, preferably from about 5 to about 80 mg, and more preferably from about 10 to about 40 mg.
  • a preferred oral dosage form such as tablets or capsules will contain the squalene synthetase inhibitor in an amount of from about 10 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 25 to about 200 mg.
  • the other hypolipidemic agent may also be a lipoxygevase inhibitor including a 15-lipoxygenase (15-LO) inhibitor such as benzimidazole derivatives as disclosed in WO 97/12615, 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed in WO 97/12613, isothiazolones as disclosed in WO 96/38144, and 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed by Sendobry et al “Attenuation of diet-induced atherosclerosis in rabbits with a highly selective 15-lipoxygenase inhibitor lacking significant antioxidant properties”, Brit. J. Pharmacology (1997) 120, 1199-1206, and Cornicelli et al, “15-Lipoxygenase and its Inhibition: A Novel Therapeutic Target for Vascular Disease”, Current Pharmaceutical Design, 1999, 5, 11-20.
  • 15-LO 15-lipoxygenase
  • the compounds of formula I and the hypolipidemic agent may be employed together in the same oral dosage form or in separate oral dosage forms taken at the same time.
  • compositions described above may be administered in the dosage forms as described above in single or divided doses of one to four times daily. It may be advisable to start a patient on a low dose combination and work up gradually to a high dose combination.
  • the preferred hypolipidemic agent is pravastatin, simvastatin, lovastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin.
  • the other type of therapeutic agent which may be optionally employed with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be 1, 2, 3 or more of an anti-obesity agent including a beta 3 adrenergic agonist, a lipase inhibitor, a serotonin (and dopamine) reuptake inhibitor, a thyroid receptor beta drug, an anorectic agent and/or a fatty acid oxidation upregulator.
  • an anti-obesity agent including a beta 3 adrenergic agonist, a lipase inhibitor, a serotonin (and dopamine) reuptake inhibitor, a thyroid receptor beta drug, an anorectic agent and/or a fatty acid oxidation upregulator.
  • the beta 3 adrenergic agonist which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be AJ9677 (Takeda/Dainippon), L750355 (Merck), or CP331648 (Pfizer) or other known beta 3 agonists as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,541,204, 5,770,615, 5,491,134, 5,776,983 and 5,488,064, with AJ9677, L750,355 and CP331648 being preferred.
  • the lipase inhibitor which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be orlistat or ATL-962 (Alizyme), with orlistat being preferred.
  • the serotonin (and dopoamine) reuptake inhibitor which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be sibutramine, topiramate (Johnson & Johnson) or axokine (Regeneron), with sibutramine and topiramate being preferred.
  • the thyroid receptor beta compound which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be a thyroid receptor ligand as disclosed in WO97/21993 (U. Cal SF), WO099/00353 (KaroBio) and GB98/284425 (KaroBio), with compounds of the KaroBio applications being preferred.
  • the anorectic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be dexamphetamine, phentermine, phenylpropanolamine or mazindol, with dexamphetamine being preferred.
  • the fatty acid oxidation upregulator which may be optionally employed in combination with the compound of formula I can be famoxin (Genset).
  • anti-obesity agents described above may be employed in the same dosage form with the compound of formula I or in different dosage forms, in dosages and regimens as generally known in the art or in the PDR.
  • the infertility agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of clomiphene citrate (Clomid®, Aventis), bromocriptine mesylate (Parlodel®, Novartis),LHRH analogs, Lupron (TAP Pharm.), danazol, Danocrine (Sanofi), progestogens or glucocorticoids, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • the agent for polycystic ovary syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH), leuprolide (Lupron®), Clomid®, Parlodel®, oral contraceptives or insulin sensitizers such as PPAR agonists, or other conventional agents for such use which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • GnRH gonadotropin releasing hormone
  • Lupron® leuprolide
  • Clomid® Parlodel®
  • oral contraceptives or insulin sensitizers such as PPAR agonists, or other conventional agents for such use which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • the agent for treating growth disorders and/or frailty which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of a growth hormone or growth hormone secretagogue such as MK-677 (Merck), CP-424,391 (Pfizer), and compounds disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 09/506,749 filed Feb. 18, 2000 (attorney docket LA26), as well as selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs), which is incorporated herein by reference, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR, where applicable.
  • a growth hormone or growth hormone secretagogue such as MK-677 (Merck), CP-424,391 (Pfizer), and compounds disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 09/506,749 filed Feb. 18, 2000 (attorney docket LA26), as well as selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs), which is incorporated herein by reference, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR, where applicable.
  • the agent for treating arthritis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of aspirin, indomethacin, ibuprofen, diclofenac sodium, naproxen, nabumetone (Relafen®, SmithKline Beecham), tolmetin sodium (Tolectin®, Ortho-McNeil), piroxicam (Feldene®, Pfizer), ketorolac tromethamine (Toradol®, Roche), celecoxib (Celebrex®, Searle), rofecoxib (Vioxx®, Merck) and the like, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • DP4 inhibitor of the invention Conventional agents for preventing allograft rejection in transplantation such as cyclosporin, Sandimmune (Novartis), azathioprine, Immuran (Faro) or methotrexate may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis and immunomodulatory diseases such as lupus erythematosis, psoriasis, for example, azathioprine, Immuran, cyclophosphamide, NSAIDS such as ibuprofen, cox 2 inhibitors such as Vioxx and Celebrex, glucocorticoids and hydroxychloroquine, may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • the AIDS agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be a non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor and/or an AIDS adjunct anti-infective and may be 1, 2, or more of dronabinol (Marinol®, Roxane Labs), didanosine (Videx®, Bristol-Myers Squibb), megestrol acetate (Megace®, Bristol-Myers Squibb), stavudine (Zerit®, Bristol-Myers Squibb), delavirdine mesylate (Rescriptor®, Pharmacia), lamivudine/zidovudine (CombivirTM, Glaxo), lamivudine (EpivirTM, Glaxo), zalcitabine (Hivid®, Roche), zidovudine (Retrovir®, Glaxo), indinavir sulfate
  • the above anti-AIDS agents may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • the agent for treating inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of sulfasalazine, salicylates, mesalamine (Asacol®, P&G) or Zelmac®, (Bristol-Myers Squibb), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR or otherwise known in the art.
  • the agent for treating osteoporosis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of alendronate sodium (Fosamax®, Merck, tiludronate (Skelid®, Sanofi), etidronate disodium (Didronel®, P&G), raloxifene HCl (Evista®, Lilly), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
  • a pharmaceutical composition will be employed containing the compounds of structure I, with or without another antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent, in association with a pharmaceutical vehicle or diluent.
  • the pharmaceutical composition can be formulated employing conventional solid or liquid vehicles or diluents and pharmaceutical additives of a type appropriate to the mode of desired administration.
  • the compounds can be administered to mammalian species including humans, monkeys, dogs, etc. by an oral route, for example, in the form of tablets, capsules, granules or powders, or they can be administered by a parenteral route in the form of injectable preparations.
  • the dose for adults is preferably between 10 and 1,000 mg per day, which can be administered in a single dose or in the form of individual doses from 1-4 times per day.
  • a typical capsule for oral administration contains compounds of structure I (250 mg), lactose (75 mg) and magnesium stearate (15 mg). The mixture is passed through a 60 mesh sieve and packed into a No. 1 gelatin capsule.
  • a typical injectable preparation is produced by aseptically placing 250 mg of compounds of structure I into a vial, aseptically freeze-drying and sealing. For use, the contents of the vial are mixed with 2 mL of physiological saline, to produce an injectable preparation.
  • DP4 inhibitor activity of the compounds of the invention may be determined by use of an in vitro assay system which measures the potentiation of inhibition of DP4.
  • Inhibition constants (Ki values) for the DP4 inhibitors of the invention may be determined by the method described below.
  • Porcine enzyme was purified as previously described (1), with several modifications. Kidneys from 15-20 animals were obtained, and the cortex was dissected away and frozen at ⁇ 80° C. Frozen tissue (2000 -2500 g) was homogenized in 12 L of 0.25 M sucrose in a Waring blender. The homogenate then was left at 37° C. for 18 hours to facilitate cleavage of DP-4 from cell membranes. After the cleavage step, the homogenate was clarified by centrifugation at 7000 ⁇ g for 20 min at 4° C., and the supernatant was collected. Solid ammonium sulfate was added to 60% saturation, and the precipitate was collected by centrifugation at 10,000 ⁇ g and was discarded. Additional ammonium sulfate was added to the supernatant to 80% saturation, and the 80% pellet was collected and dissolved in 20 mM Na 2 HPO 4 , pH 7.4.
  • the preparation was clarified by centrifugation at 10,000 ⁇ g. The clarified preparation then was applied to 300 mL of ConA Sepharose that had been equilibrated in the same buffer. After washing with buffer to a constant A 280 , the column was eluted with 5% (w/v) methyl ⁇ -D-mannopyranoside. Active fractions were pooled, concentrated, and dialyzed against 5 mM sodium acetate, pH 5.0. Dialyzed material then was flowed through a 100 mL Pharmacia Resource S column equilibrated in the same buffer. The flow through material was collected and contained most of the enzyme activity.
  • Active material again was concentrated and dialyzed into 20 mM Na 2 HPO 4 , pH 7.4. Lastly, the concentrated enzyme was chromatographed on a Pharmacia S-200 gel filtration column to removed low molecular weight contaminants. Purity of column fractions was analyzed by reducing SDS-PAGE, and the purest fractions were pooled and concentrated. Purified enzyme was stored in 20% glycerol at ⁇ 80° C.
  • Enzyme was assayed under steady-state conditions as previously described (2) with gly-pro-p-nitroanilide as substrate, with the following modifications. Reactions contained, in a final volume of 100 ⁇ l, 100 mM Aces, 52 mM TRIS, 52 mM ethanolamine, 500 ⁇ M gly-pro-p-nitroanilide, 0.2 % DMSO, and 4.5 nM enzyme at 25° C., pH 7.4. For single assays at 10 ⁇ M test compound, buffer, compound, and enzyme were added to wells of a 96 well microtiter plate, and were incubated at room temperature for 5 min.
  • Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge; Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128] or with the following modifications.
  • L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester was N-protected as the t-butylcarbamate (Boc 20 , DMAP or NaH) and then dehydrated to the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester in one pot by carbonyl reduction (triethylborohydride, toluene, ⁇ 78° C.) followed by dehydration (TFAA, lutidine).
  • L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester (200 g, 1.27 mol) was dissolved in 1.2 liters of methylene chloride and treated sequentially with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (297 g, 1.36 mol) and a catalytic DMAP (1.55 g, 0.013 mol) at ambient temperature. After 6 h, the mixture was quenched with saturated brine and the organic phase was dried (Na 2 SO 4 ) and filtered through a short silica gel column to give 323 g (100%) of N-Boc- L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester.
  • N-Boc-L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester 160 g, 0.62 mol was dissolved in 1 liter of toluene, cooled to ⁇ 78° C. and treated with lithium triethylborohydride (666 mL of a 1.0 M soln in THF) and added dropwise over 90 minutes. After 3 h, 2,6-lutidine (423 mL, 3.73 mol) was added dropwise followed by DMAP (0.2 g, 0.0016 mol). To this mixture was added TFAA (157 g, 0.74 mol) and the reaction was allowed to come to ambient temperature over 2 h.
  • 4,5-Dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester (35.0 g, 0.145 mol) was added to a solution of neat Et 2 Zn (35.8 g, 0.209 mol) in 1 liter of 1,2-dichloroethane at ⁇ 15° C. To this mixture was added a dropwise addition of ClCH 2 I (102 g, 0.58 mol) over 1 h and the mixture stirred at ⁇ 15° C. for 18 h.
  • reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous bicarbonate and the solvent was evaporated and the reaction was taken up in EtOAc, washed with brine and purified by silica gel chromatography using a stepwise gradient of from 20% EtOAc/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes to give 17.5 g (50%) of diastereomerically pure step 1 title compound.
  • Step 1 compound (411 mg, 1.61 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (1.5 mL) at rt was added TFA (1.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated. The residue was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 and then evaporated and re-evaporated three times to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 433 mg, 100% yield,
  • Step 3 compound 530 mg, 1.44 mmol
  • MeOH MeOH
  • H 2 O 4 mL
  • LiOH—H 2 O 91 mg, 2.16 mmol
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight and evaporated.
  • Water (10 mL) was added to the residue and extracted with Et 2 O (2 ⁇ 10 mL).
  • the aqueous layer was acidified to ⁇ pH 4 by adding 4% KHSO 4 dropwise.
  • the milky solution was extracted with EtOAc (15 mL ⁇ 3). Combined EtOAc layers were washed with brine, dried over Na 2 SO 4 and evaporated to give the title compound as a white solid, 440 mg, 90% yield.
  • Step 4 compound 300 mg, 0.88 mmol
  • THF 6 mL
  • 4-methylmorpholine 0.12 mL, 1.06 mmol
  • isobutyl chloroformate 0.13 mL, 0.97 mmol
  • White precipitate was formed.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at ⁇ 15° C. under nitrogen for 25 min and a solution of NH 3 in dioxane (8.8 mL, 4.4 mmol) was added.
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at ⁇ 15° C. for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred at rt overnight.
  • Step 5 compound (248 mg, 1.38 mmol) and imidazole (94 mg, 1.38 mmol) in dry pyridine (12 mL) at ⁇ 35° C. under nitrogen was added POCl 3 (0.26 mL, 2.76 mmol) dropwise.
  • POCl 3 (0.26 mL, 2.76 mmol
  • the reaction mixture was stirred between ⁇ 35° C. to ⁇ 20° C. for 1 h and evaporated.
  • CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL) was added and white precipitates were formed. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (2:5 EtOAc/hexane) to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 196 mg, 88% yield.
  • Step 6 compound 130 mg, 0.4 mmol
  • CH 2 Cl 2 2 mL
  • TFA 2 mL
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h.
  • the reaction mixture was added slowly to a pre-cooled slurry of NaHCO 3 (3.8 g) in H 2 O (3 mL).
  • Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure. [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge; Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128.]
  • Step 1 title compound was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Pat. No. 4,183,857.].
  • Step 1 title compound, as a 1:1 ratio of enantiomers, was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Pat. No. 4,183,857.]
  • Example 4 To a solution of Example 4, Step 1 compound (150 mg, 1.39 mmol) in 2-propanol (0.8 mL), was added NaCN (40 mg, 1.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 3 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture was evaporated and then slurried in Et 2 O (5 mL). After filtration, the filtrate was evaporated to give Example 4 Step 1 compounds and Example 5 Step 1 compounds (140 mg, 93%) as a 2:1 mixture of diastereomers, each as a racemic mixture.
  • Example 1 Step 1 compound (1.40 g, 5.49 mmol) in 40 mL of a 1:1 methanol:water solution at rt was added lithium hydroxide (0.20 g, 8.30 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h and then heated to 50° C. for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with equal volumes of ether and water (50 mL) and then acidified with KHSO 4 to pH 3. The milky solution was extracted with ether (3 ⁇ 20 mL). The combined ether layers were dried over Na 2 SO 4 and evaporated. The residue was stripped from toluene (2 ⁇ 10 mL) and dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a thick syrup, 1.20 g, 96%.
  • Step 1 compound (1.20 g, 5.28 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at ⁇ 15° C. under nitrogen was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.71 mL, 6.50 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.78 mL, 6.00 mmol) over 5 min.
  • the reaction was stirred at ⁇ 15° C. for 30 min, cooled to ⁇ 30° C. and treated with a solution of NH 3 in dioxane (50 mL, 25 mmol).
  • the reaction mixture was stirred at ⁇ 30° C. for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred overnight.
  • Step 2 compound (0.90 g, 4.00 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (3 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (3 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to produce title compound in the form of a thick oil, 0.98 g, 100%. The oil gradually solidified upon prolonged standing.
  • Step 3 compound 56 mg, 0.22 mmol
  • N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-(L)-tert-leucine 53 mg, 0.23 mmol
  • dimethylaminopyridine 0.11 g, 0.88 mmol
  • CH 2 Cl 2 4 mL
  • the tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and treated with 1-[(3-(dimethypamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide (84 mg, 0.44 mmol). The mixture was placed in a shaker and vortexed overnight.
  • the product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology SCX column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a SCX ion exchange column and successively washing with CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL), 30% methanol in CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL), 50% methanol in CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) and methanol (10 mL).
  • the product containing fractions were concentrated under reduced pressure to give the desired amide.
  • Further purification by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 ⁇ 250 mm column gave the title compound, 50 mg (68% yield).
  • Purification conditions Gradient elution from 30% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min. 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 14 min.
  • Step 4 compound 50 mg, 0.15 mmol
  • imidazole 31 mg, 0.46 mmol
  • pyridine 1 mL
  • the tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and cooled to ⁇ 30° C.
  • Slow addition of POCl 3 141 mg, 88 uL, 0.92 mmol gave after mixing a thick slurry.
  • the tube was mixed at ⁇ 30° C. for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated.
  • the product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology silica extraction column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a silica column and successively washing with CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL), 5% methanol in CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL), 7% methanol in CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) and 12% methanol in CH 2 Cl 2 (10 mL).
  • the product containing fractions were pooled and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound, 46 mg, 96%.
  • Step 5 compound (0.45 mg, 0.14 mmol), CH 2 Cl 2 (1 mL), and TFA (1 mL).
  • the reaction mixture was vortexed for 40 min at rt, diluted with toluene (4 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil.
  • the product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 ⁇ 250 mm column to give the Example 6 compound, 14 mg, 35%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 18 min; 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 10 min.
  • Examples 7-27 were prepared from amino acids available from commercial sources according to the procedure in Example 6.
  • Step 1 amide was dehydrated to the nitrile using the general method C (which follows Example 29) (FAB MH+462).
  • Step 2 benzyl ether was cleaved by catalytic hydrogenolysis using 10% palladium on carbon and 1 atmosphere hydrogen gas in MeOH at rt for 1.5 h.
  • the reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated to an oil and taken on without further purification (FAB MH+372).
  • Step 3 N-[N-Boc-L-Tyrosine-]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 and TFA was added at rt. The reaction stirred for 1 h and was evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC as described in general method B (set out following Example 29) to afford the title compound (FAB MH+272).
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt described in Example 6 Step 3 compound with N-(tert-butyloxy-carbonylhydroxyvaline. After hydroxyl protection with triethylsilyl chloride and dehydration of the amide with POCl 3 /imidazole in pyridine and deprotection (N-terminal nitrogen and valine hydroxyl) with TFA using general method C (FAB MH+224), the title compound was obtained.
  • Step 1 compound 333 mg, 1.0 mmol
  • 6 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 1-[3-(dimethylamino)-propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (256 mg, 1.32 mmol).
  • the solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, followed by addition with Example 6 Step 3 amine TFA salt (160 mg, 0.66 mmol) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (244 mg, 2.0 mmol).
  • the solution was then stirred at rt overnight.
  • Step 2 compound 350 mg, 0.79 mmol
  • imidazole 108 mg, 1.58 mmol
  • pyridine 3 mL
  • the flask under argon was cooled to ⁇ 30° C.
  • Slow addition of POCl 3 (0.30 mL, 3.16 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry.
  • the slurry was mixed at ⁇ 30° C. for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated.
  • Dichloromethane (5 mL) was then added and the insoluble solid was removed by filtration.
  • the organic layer was washed with H 2 O, 10% citric acid, brine and dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Removal of solvent gave crude desired nitrile (330 mg) (LC/Mass, + ion): 424 (M+H).
  • Trifluoroacetic acid (3.3 mL) was added to a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (330 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.3 mL CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • the solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, a few drops of water were added and the mixture mixture stirred for 0.5 h.
  • the mixture was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil.
  • the product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 ⁇ 100 mm column to give the title compound, 59 mg, 17%.
  • Step 2 To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycine (13.45 g, 76.75 mmol) in 100 mL CH 2 Cl 2 at rt was added Step 2 compound 8.61 g, 76.75 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in 20 mL CH 2 Cl 2 , followed by dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (16.63 g, mmol, 1.05 equiv) in 80 mL CH 2 Cl 2 . To this reaction mixture was then added 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.94 mg, mmol, 0.10 equiv), and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight.
  • 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.94 mg, mmol, 0.10 equiv
  • reaction mixture was then filtered through a medium sintered-glass funnel, rinsing with 100 mL CH 2 Cl 2 , and concentrated under reduced pressure.
  • the crude product was then purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, hexanes/EtOAc, 20:1 to 1:1 gradient) to give 19.43 g (94%) of the desired glycinyl ester as a colorless oil.
  • the TFA salt of amide 13 was coupled to a variety of racemic quaternary protected amino acids using HOBT/EDC in DMF at rt to give a D/L mixture of diastereomers at the N-terminal amino acid.
  • the desired L diastereomer was chromatographically isolated either as the amide 21 or as the nitrile 22.
  • Nitrile 22 was obtained by treatment of the amide with POCl 3 /imidazole in pyridine at ⁇ 20° C.
  • the final target 23 was obtained by deprotection under acidic conditions using TFA in CH 2 Cl 2 .
  • Example 6 Step 3 compound (877 mg, 3.65 mmol) and N-Boc cyclopentylvinylamino acid, described in Step 4 of general method B (1.13 g, 4.20 mmol) were dissolved in 20 mL anhydrous DMF, cooled to 0° C. and to this mixture was added EDAC (1.62 g, 8.4 mmol), HOBT hydrate (2.54 g, 12.6 mmol, and TEA (1.27 g, 12.6 mmol) and the reaction was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 24 h.
  • Step 1 compound (1.38 g, 3.65 mmol) and imidazole (497 mg, 7.30 mmol) were dried by toluene azeotrope (5 mL ⁇ 2), dissolved in 10 mL anhydrous pyridine, cooled to ⁇ 30° C. under nitrogen gas and POCl 3 (2.23 g, 14.60 mmol) was added by syringe.
  • the reaction was complete after 1 h and was evaporated to dryness and the remainder purified by two sequential flash column chromatographies over silica gel. The first column (100% EtOAc) was used to isolate the mixture of diastereomers (1.15 g, 88%) from the by-products of the reaction.
  • the second column gradient of 25% EtOAC/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes was run to resolve the mixture of diastereomers and provided 504 mg of the desired Step 2 nitrile (MH+360).
  • Step 2 compound (32 mg, 0.09 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 and 1 mL of TFA was added and the reaction stirred for 30 min at rt and was evaporated to dryness.
  • the product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 ⁇ 250 mm column to give 12 mg of the TFA salt (lyophilized from water or isolated after evaporation of eluent and trituration with ether) the title compound.
  • Purification conditions gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 18 min; 5 min. hold at 90% water/0.1 trifluoroacetic acid. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220.
  • Examples 30-39 were prepared by the methods outlined in General Method B and General Method C starting from cyclopentanone, cyclobutanone, cyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cis-3,4-dimethylcyclopentanone, and 4-pyranone, cyclopropaneethylhemiacetal, acetone, and 3-pentanone respectively.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclopentanone and 2-fluorotriethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclobutanone and 2-fluorotriethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclopentanone and triethylphosphono propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclobutanone and triethylphosphono propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
  • N-Boc protected cyclobutylvinyl compound (Example 31, prepared by general method C) (0.16 g, 0.46 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of a 1:1 mixture of THF:water and treated with OsO4 (12 mg, catalyst) and NaIO 4 (0.59 g, 2.76 mmol, 6 equiv). After 2 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 10 mL of water. The layers were equilibrated and the organic fraction was washed one time with NaHCO 3 solution, dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to give a dark oil. The oil was diluted with 10 mL of methanol and treated with NaBH 4 (0.08 g, 2.0 mmol).
  • Part B A 200-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part A solid (@ 39 mmol) and diluted with 80 mL of ethanol and 39 mL of 2N HCl (78 mmol). The mixture was treated with 1.0 g of 5% Pd/carbon and the mixture degassed. The flask was placed under an atmosphere of H 2 for 8 h. The mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate concentrated to an off white solid.
  • Part C A 250-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part B solid and diluted with THF (50 mL) and water (15 mL). The mixture was treated with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (12.7 g, 117 mmol) and sodium bicarbonate (10.0 g, 117 mmol). After 4 h of stirring the mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 50 mL of water. The layers were separated and the organic fraction dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 30% EtOAc in hexanes to give 2.00 g (22% overall) of Step 1 compound as a white solid.
  • Step 1 compound (1.00 g, 3.80 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at rt under nitrogen was added LiOH hydrate (0.16 g, 3.80 mmol) and then water (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at 40° C. for 0.5 h and then cooled to rt. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and the remainder was stripped from THF (2 ⁇ ), toluene (2 ⁇ ) and THF (1 ⁇ ). The remaining glass was diluted with 5 mL of THF and treated with imidazole (0.63 g, 9.19 mmol) followed by t-butyl-dimethylsilyl chloride (1.26 g, 8.36 mmol).
  • Step 2 The reaction was stirred overnight and quenched with 10 mL of methanol. After 1 h of stirring the mixture was concentrated. An additional portion of methanol was added and the mixture concentrated. The oil was diluted with ether and 0.1 N HCl (pH 2). The layers were equilibrated and aqueous drawn off. The organic fraction was dried over MgSO 4 and concentrated to give 1.25 g (83%) of Step 2 compound as a colorless glass.
  • Examples 50-56 were prepared by the peptide coupling of amino acids (where the vinyl substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.
  • Example 57 The title compound in Example 57 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclobutane amino acid (where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.
  • Example 58 The title compound in Example 58 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclopentane amino acid (where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 276
  • Step 1 compound (10.7 g, 0.055 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (150 mL) under argon and was treated with a solution of LiAlH 4 (1 M in THF, 69 mL, 69 mmol, 1.25 equiv). After stirring at rt for 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0° C. and quenched sequentially with H 2 O (5.1 mL), 15% aq NaOH (5.1 mL), and H 2 O (10.2 mL). After stirring at rt for 15 min, the slurry was vacuum filtered, and the solids washed with EtOAc (2 ⁇ 100 mL).
  • Step 3 compound (9.40 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) was suspended in H 2 O (145 mL) and cooled to 0° C. The mixture was treated with NaHSO 3 (5.95 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv), KCN (4.0 g, 59 mmol, 1.04 equiv), and a solution of (R)-( ⁇ )-phenylglycinol (8.01 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) in MeOH (55 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h, then refluxed for 16 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and 200 mL of EtOAc added. After mixing for 15 min the layers were separated.
  • Step 4 nitrile (5.65 g, 18 mmol) was heated in conc. HCl (120 mL) and HOAc (30 mL) at 80° C. for 18 h, at which time the reaction was cooled in an ice bath. Vacuum filtration of the resulting precipitate afforded the desired product as a white solid (5.21 g, 14 mmol, 78%). MS m/e 330 (m+H) + .
  • Step 6 compound (5.21 g, 14 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (50 mL) and HOAc (10 mL), and hydrogenated with H 2 (50 psi) and Pearlman's catalyst (20% Pd(OH) 2 , 1.04 g, 20% w/w) for 18 h.
  • the reaction was filtered through a PTFE membrane filter and the catalyst washed with MeOH (3 ⁇ 25 mL). The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation to afford a white solid.
  • the product was used in Step 7 without further purification.
  • Step 6 compound (@ 14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (50 mL) under argon and treated with K 2 CO 3 (5.90 g, 42 mmol, 3 equiv) and di-tert-butyldicarbonate (3.14 g, 14 mmol, 1 equiv) under argon at rt. After 19 h, the DMF was removed by rotary evaporation (pump) and the residue dried further under reduced pressure. The residue was mixed with H 2 O (100 mL) and Et 2 O (100 mL), the layers separated, and the alkaline aqueous with Et 2 O (2 ⁇ 100 mL) to remove the by-product from the hydrogenolysis step.
  • K 2 CO 3 5.90 g, 42 mmol, 3 equiv
  • di-tert-butyldicarbonate 3.14 g, 14 mmol, 1 equiv
  • the aqueous was cooled to 0° C., diluted with EtOAc (200 mL), and stirred vigorously while care fully acidifying the aqueous to pH 3 with 1N aq HCl.
  • the layers separated and the aqueous extracted with EtOAc (100 mL).
  • the combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered and the filtrate concentrated by rotary evaporation.
  • the residue was purified by SiO 2 flash column (5 ⁇ 12 cm) with 5% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 +0.5% HOAc.
  • the product was chased with hexanes to afford the product as a white foam (4.07 g, 13 mmol, 92%): MS m/e 310 (m+H) + .
  • Example 59 The title compound in Example 59 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the Step 7 compound in general method G followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS m/e 300 (m+H) + .
  • Step 1 compound (404 mg, 1.24 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (10 mL) under argon and cooled to 0° C. The following were added in order: Example 6 Step 3 salt (328 mg, 1.37 mmol, 1.1 equiv), HOBT (520 mg, 3.85 mmol, 3.1 equiv), EDAC (510 mg, 2.61 mmol, 2.1 equiv), and TEA (0.54 mL, 3.85 mmol, 3.1 equiv). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to rt overnight and the DMF removed by rotary evaporation (pump). The remainder was dried further under vacuum.
  • Step 2 compound (95 mg, 0.22 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (2.5 mL) under argon and cooled to ⁇ 78° C.
  • the mixture was treated with diisopropylethylamine (65 ⁇ L, 0.37 mmol, 1.7 equiv), and triethylsilyl triflate (75 ⁇ L, 0.33 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 h.
  • the reaction was mixed with MeOH (0.5 mL), silica gel (200 mg) and H 2 O (2 drops) and stirred at rt for 18 h.
  • Step 3 compound (90 mg, 0.16 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (2 mL) under argon and cooled to ⁇ 30° C.
  • the product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5 ⁇ 10 cm) with 7% EtOAc/CH 2 Cl 2 to afford the product as a white foam (76 mg, 87%): MS m/e 530 (m+H) +
  • Step 4 compound (76 mg, 0.14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH 2 Cl 2 (1 mL) and cooled to 0° C. and treated with TFA (1 mL) and H 2 O (2 drops) and stirred for 1.5 hr at 0° C. The solvents were removed by rotary evaporation and the residue was chased with toluene (5 mL) and dried under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et 2 O afforded the title compound as a white solid (54 mg, 88%): MS m/e 316 (m+H) + .
  • the fluorinated amide from Step 1 (161 mg, 0.37 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (4 mL) under argon and cooled to ⁇ 30° C. The mixture was treated with imidazole (54 mg, 0.77 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (143 ⁇ L, 1.52 mmol, 4.1 equiv) and stirred at ⁇ 30° C. for 40 min. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and dried further under reduced pressure.
  • Step 2 compound 125 mg, 0.30 mmol was dissolved in TFA/CH 2 Cl 2 (1:1 v/v, 2 mL), and stirred at rt. After 30 min, the solvents were removed by rotary evaporation, the remainder was chased with toluene (2 ⁇ 5 mL), and the solid dried under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et 2 O afforded the title compound as a white solid (93 mg, 0.21 mmol, 72%): MS m/e 318 (m+H) + .
  • Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 2-adamantanal and elaborated to the homochiral Boc-amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
  • Example 62 The title compound in Example 62 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 2-adamantyl amino acid described in Step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS (M+H) 300.
  • the mixture was washed with 10% aq NaHS0 3 (50 mL), H 2 O (2 ⁇ 50 mL), and brine (25 mL).
  • the ether fraction was dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered and concentrated by rotary evaporation.
  • the product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5 ⁇ 15 cm) with 2% to 4% MeOH/CH 2 Cl 2 +0.5% HOAc.
  • the product was chased with hexanes to remove residual HOAc.
  • the isolated material consists of two inseparable materials (4.7 g), which was used without further purification in the next step.
  • Methyl exo-2-bromonorbornane-1-carboxylate (2.0 g, 8.58 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (50 mL) in an oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with a condenser, and purged with argon. The mixture was treated with AIBN (288 mg, 1.71 mmol, 0.2 equiv) and tributyltin hydride (3.6 mL, 12.87 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and then heated to reflux for 2 h. The flask was cooled to rt, and the THF was removed by rotary evaporation to give the crude product. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel(5 ⁇ 10 cm) with 5% EtOAc/hexanes. The resulting material was used in the next step without further purification.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 1-norbonyl methyl carboxylate and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
  • Example 63 The title compound in Example 63 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 1-norbonyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 4-formylpyran and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
  • Example 64 The title compound in Example 64 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 4-pyranyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 250.
  • Step 1 compound (0.80 g, 4.50 mmol) in 15 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 at rt was added celite (5 g) followed by PCC (1.95 g, 5.00 mmol). After stirring for 3 h the reaction mixture was diluted with 40 mL of CH 2 Cl 2 and filtered through celite. The filtrate was filtered an additional time through silica gel resulting in a colorless filtrate. The CH 2 Cl 2 fraction was evaporated to give 0.72 g (91%) of the aldehyde as a colorless oil.
  • Step 2 compound (0.72 g, 4.20 mmol) in 8 mL of water at rt was added NaCN (0.20 g, 4.20 mmol) followed by NH 4 Cl (0.20 g, 5.00 mmol).
  • methanol 8 mL
  • the reaction mixture was then extracted with ether (2 ⁇ 15 mL), dried (MgSO 4 ) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude Strecker product.
  • Step 1 compound The synthesis of the Step 1 compound was described in general method H for the Strecker synthesis of racemic amino acids.
  • Example 65 The title compound in Example 65 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the cyclopentylphenyl amino acid described in Step 1 and general method H followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 310.
  • Step 1 compound was prepared using racemic Strecker synthesis according to general method H starting from 2,2-dimethyl-phenylacetic acid.
  • Example 66 The title compound in Example 66 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the dimethylphenyl amino acid described in step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 284.
  • N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)succinimide (5.6 g, 22.4 mmol) was dissolved in CH 2 Cl 2 (25 mL) and the solution was added to a cooled (0° C.) and stirred solution of diethyl aminomalonate hydrochloride (5.0 g, 23.6 mmol) and triethylamine (13.4 mL, 95 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (125 ml). The resulting solution was stirred at 0° C. for 10 min and then at rt for 1 h.
  • Step 1 compound (6.18 g, 20 mmol) was dissolved in dry ethanol (30 mL) and added to a solution of sodium ethoxide (2.85 g, 8.8 m mol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol (6 mL).
  • Acetic acid (0.56 mL) was then added the solution hydrogenated at 50 psi for 24 h using 10% Pd/C (2.0 g) as catalyst.
  • Step 2 compound (173 mg, 0.97 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (3 mL)/water (3 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (0.46 mL, 3.18 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (0.23 g, 1.06 mmol), and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 5 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH 2 Cl 2 /methanol (9:1) as eluent to yield t-butyloxy-carbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline (200 mg) as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 244 (M+H).
  • Example 67 The title compound in Example 67 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the t-butyloxycarbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline amino acid described in Step 3 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 220.
  • Step 1 compound (2.87 g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25° C. by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h at rt, the solution was concentrated. The residue was diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (100 mL) , then treated with H 2 O (50 mL) and solid Na 2 CO 3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered, then concentrated to give the Step 2 compound as a yellow oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass: + ions, 308 M+Na).
  • Step 2 compound (3.73 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N HCl (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was then cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the title compound (1.2 g, 70.6%) (LC/Mass, + ion): 144 (M+H).
  • Step 3 compound (692 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (12 mL)/ water (12 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvents were evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica with 1:9 methanol:CH 2 Cl 2 to give the Step 4 compound as an oil (LC/Mass: + ions, 266 M+Na).
  • Example 68 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 234).
  • Step 1 compound (3.0g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH 2 Cl 2 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25° C., by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h at rt, the solution was concentrated, the residue diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (100 mL), then treated with H 2 O (50 mL) and solid Na 2 CO 3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na 2 SO 4 ), filtered, then concentrated to give the title compound as an oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass:+ ions, 300 M+H).
  • Step 2 compound (3.8 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N HCl (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the step 3 compound (1.4 g, 76.0%).
  • Step 3 compound (728 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 acetone/water solution (24 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH 2 Cl 2 /methanol (9:1) as eluent to give the title compound as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 258 (M+H).
  • Example 69 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 248).
  • Step 1 compound was prepared by the procedure described in General Method C starting from N-Boc-S-t-butylcysteine.
  • Step 1 compound (78 mg, 0.21 mmol) and chloroform (3 mL).
  • the mixture was cooled to 0° C. and treated with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (85 mg, 0.44 mmol) in CHCl 3 (2 mL).
  • the solution was diluted with CHCl 3 (7 mL), washed with 5% NaHCO 3 (2 ⁇ 5 mL), H 2 O and dried over Na 2 SO 4 . Removal of solvent gave crude sulfoxide (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ions): 384 (M+H).
  • Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0° C.) solution of Step 2 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL CH 2 Cl 2 . The solution was then stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 h, diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 ⁇ 100 mm column to give the title compound of Example 70 , 17 mg, 16%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min (LC/Mass, + ion): 284 (M+H).
  • Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0° C.) and stirred solution of Step 1 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL CH 2 Cl 2 . The solution was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min, diluted with CH 2 Cl 2 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20 ⁇ 100 mm column to give the title compound, 14 mg, 17%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min. (LC/Mass, + ion): 300 (M+H).
  • the title compound was prepared following a published procedure (Sasaki et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 1995, 36, 3149, Sasaki et al. Tetrahedron 1994, 50, 7093) used to synthesize (2S,3R,4S)-N-Boc-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxylate.
  • the corresponding amide was prepared by general method A and deprotected with TFA to give the TFA salt also as described in general method A.
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-cyclohexylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl 3 /imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+248).
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-tert-butylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl 3 /imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+222).
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1′ethylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl 3 /imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+262).
  • the title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1′vinylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl 3 /imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using General Method C (FAB MH+260).
  • Step 2 N-[((S)-cyclopentylvinyl)-N-tert-butoxycarbonylglycinyl]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide (70 mg, 0.19 mmol) described in General Method C, Step 2 was dissolved in a mixture of 2 mL t-BuOH/3 mL THF and N-methylmorpholine-N-oxide (33mg, 0.28 mmol) was added followed by osmium tetroxide (0.1 mmol, 50 mol %).
  • Cyclohexanone and diethylmalonate underwent Knoevenagel condensation mediated by titanium tetrachloride in THF and CCl 4 to give 40.
  • Copper (I) mediated Grignard addition of methylmagnesium bromide gave 41 which was selectively saponified to 42.
  • Curtius rearrangement with trapping by benzyl alcohol gave 43 which was converted to 44 by a standard deprotection-protection protocol. Ester 44 was saponified to give the quaternary amino acid 45.
  • reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (32 mL, 0.40 mole) in dry THF (60 mL), stirred at 0° C. for 1.0 h, then at rt for 72 h.
  • the reaction mixture was quenched with water (100 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2 ⁇ 200 mL).
  • the combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (100 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 5.25 g (22%). MS (M+Na) 263.
  • Step 2 compound (1.09 g, 4.03 mmol) in a mixture of methanol (5.4 mL) and water (2.7 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (4.84 mL, 4.84 mmol or 1.2 equiv) and stirred at rt for 6 days.
  • the reaction mixture still showed the presence of starting material, so THF (4.0 mL) was added and the entire mixture stirred for another 2 days.
  • the solution was evaporated to dryness and the resulting syrup partitioned between water (8.0 mL) and ether (15 mL).
  • the aqueous phase was acidified with 1N hydrochloric acid (4.8 mL) to pH 2-3 and extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 25 mL).
  • step 3 compound as a thick syrup. Yield: 875 mg, (95.1%). MS (M+H) 229.
  • solutions of the diester in a mixture of ethanol, THF, dioxane and water or mixtures thereof may be hydrolyzed with sodium hydroxide.
  • Step 3 compound 0.875 g, 3.83 mmol
  • dry benzene 4.0 mL
  • triethylamine 0.52 mL, 3.83 mmol
  • diphenylphosphoryl azide 0.85 mL, 3.83 mmol
  • the solution was treated with benzyl alcohol (0.60 mL, 5.75 mmol or 1.5 equiv), refluxed for 17 h, cooled then diluted with ether (40 mL).
  • Step 4 compound (1.15 g, 3.46 mmol) in EtOAc (60 mL) was treated with palladium hydroxide on carbon (298 mg) and hydrogenated at rt for 20 h. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad and then washing the pad well with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 25 mL) then the filtrate was concentrated to give the free amine.
  • a solution of the amine in tetrahydrofuran (12 mL) and water (12 mL) was treated with di-t-butyl dicarbonate (1.0 g, 4.58 mmol or 1.48 equiv) and potassium carbonate (854 mg, 6.18 mmol or 2.0 equiv), then stirred at rt for 20 h.
  • Solutions of the benzylcarbamate in methanol may be subjected to hydrogenolysis in the present of di-t-butyldicarbonate to give the BOC-protected amine in a “one-pot” manner.
  • Step 5 compound (1.18 g, 3.09 mmol) in dioxane (8.0 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (9.1 mL, 9.1 mmol or 3.0 equiv) and stirred at 60° C. (oil bath) for 28 h.
  • the reaction mixture was concentrated to a syrup which was dissolved in water (15 mL) and extracted with ether (25 mL).
  • the aqueous phase was acidified to pH 2-3 with 1N hydrochloric acid (9.2 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3 ⁇ 50 mL).
  • the combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (10 mL), dried (MgSO 4 ), filtered, and concentrated to give Step 6 compound as an off-white solid. Yield: 808 mg (96%).
  • Compounds 90-100 were prepared by General Method I and General Method C starting from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone and cyclobutanone, and employing methyl-, ethyl-, allyl- and propylmagnesium halides as Grignard reagents.
  • Example 79 A mixture of dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0° C. (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (11.0 mL, 0.1 mol). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0° C. for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclopentanone (4.42 mL, 0.05 mol) and distilled diethylmalonate (7.6 mL, 0.05 mol) then stirred at 0° C. for 30 min The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (16 mL, 0.20 mol) in dry THF (30 mL), stirred at 0° C.
  • Step 1 compound (1.00 g 4.42 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was treated with 10% Pd/C (0.20 g, 10 mol %) and hydrogenated (balloon pressure) at rt for 20 h.
  • the mixture was diluted with methanol and filtered through a pad of celite.
  • the filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 7% EtOAc in hexanes to give 0.84 g (91%) of Step 2 compound.
  • Step 3 compound was prepared by the process outlined in General Method H, where the ester underwent hydrolysis, Curtius Rearrangement, protecting group exchange, and again final ester hydrolysis.
  • Examples 86 and 87 were prepared by the procedures used for Example 85 starting from cyclohexanone and cyclobutanone respectively
  • Step 1 compound was prepared in Example 6 Step 1.

Abstract

Dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP 4) inhibiting compounds are provided having the formula
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00001

where
    • x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1 (provided that
    • x=1 when y=0 and x=0 when y=1);
    • n is 0 or 1; X is H or CN;
    • and wherein R1, R2, R3 and R4 are as described herein.
A method is also provided for treating diabetes and related diseases, especially Type II diabetes, and other diseases as set out herein, employing such DP 4 inhibitor *or a combination of such DP 4 inhibitor and one or more of another antidiabetic agent such as metformin, glyburide, troglitazone, pioglitazone, rosiglitazone and/or insulin and/or one or more of a hypolipidemic agent and/or anti-obesity agent and/or other therapeutic agent.

Description

This application takes priority from U.S. provisional application No. 60/188,555, filed Mar. 10, 2000.
FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-4), and to a method for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, diabetic complications, hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as various immunomodulatory diseases and chronic inflammatory bowel disease, employing such cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidines alone or in combination with another type antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Depeptidyl peptidase IV (DP-4) is a membrane bound non-classical serine aminodipeptidase which is located in a variety of tissues (intestine, liver, lung, kidney) as well as on circulating T-lymphocytes (where the enzyme is known as CD-26). It is responsible for the metabolic cleavage of certain endogenous peptides (GLP-1(7-36), glucagon) in vivo and has demonstrated proteolytic activity against a variety of other peptides (GHRH, NPY, GLP-2, VIP) in vitro.
GLP-1(7-36) is a 29 amino-acid peptide derived by post-translational processing of proglucagon in the small intestine. GLP-1(7-36) has multiple actions in vivo including the stimulation of insulin secretion, inhibition of glucagon secretion, the promotion of satiety, and the slowing of gastric emptying. Based on its physiological profile, the actions of GLP-1(7-36) are expected to be beneficial in the prevention and treatment of type II diabetes and potentially obesity. To support this claim, exogenous administration of GLP-1(7-36) (continuous infusion) in diabetic patients has demonstrated efficacy in this patient population. Unfortunately GLP-1(7-36) is degraded rapidly in vivo and has been shown to have a short half-life in vivo (t1/2≈1.5 min). Based on a study of genetically bred DP-4 KO mice and on in vivo/in vitro studies with selective DP-4 inhibitors, DP-4 has been shown to be the primary degrading enzyme of GLP-1(7-36) in vivo. GLP-1(7-36) is degraded by DP-4 efficiently to GLP-1(9-36), which has been speculated to act as a physiological antagonist to GLP-1(7-36). Thus, inhibition of DP-4 in vivo should potentiate endogenous levels of GLP-1(7-36) and attenuate formation of its antagonist GLP-1(9-36) and thus serve to ameliorate the diabetic condition.
DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
In accordance with the present invention, cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based compounds are provided which inhibit DP-4 and have the structure
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00002

wherein
    • x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1 (provided that
    • x=1 when y=0 and
    • x=0 when y=1);
    • n is 0 or 1;
    • X is H or CN (that is cyano);
    • R1, R2, R3 and R4are the same or different and are independently selected from H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, bicycloalkylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylalkylthioalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl and cycloheteroalkylalkyl, all optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, alkyl, polyhaloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, polyhaloalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, polycycloalkyl, heteroarylamino, arylamino, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, thiol, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, acyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkynylaminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, alkenylaminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, alkylaminocarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido or sulfonyl;
    • and R1 and R3 may optionally be taken together to form —(CR5R6)m— where m is 2 to 6, and R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or R1 and R4 may optionally be taken together to form —(CR7R8)p— where p is 2 to 6, and R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or optionally R1 and R3 together with
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00003
    •  form a 5 to 7 membered ring containing a total of 2 to 4 heteroatoms selected from N, O, S, SO, or SO2;
    • or optionally R1 and R3 together with
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00004
    •  form a 4 to 8 membered cycloheteroalkyl ring wherein the cycloheteroalkyl ring has an optional aryl ring fused thereto or an optional 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl ring fused thereto;
    • and including pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, and prodrug esters thereof, and all stereoisomers thereof.
Thus, the compounds of formula I of the invention include the following structures
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00005
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00006
In addition, in accordance with the present invention, a method is provided for treating diabetes, especially Type II diabetes, as well as impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplantation, autoimmune diseases (such as scleroderma and multiple sclerosis), various immunomodulatory diseases (such as lupus erythematosis or psoriasis), AIDS, intestinal diseases (such as necrotizing enteritis, microvillus inclusion disease or celiac disease), inflammatory bowel syndrome, chemotherapy-induced intestinal mucosal atrophy or injury, anorexia nervosa, osteoporosis, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, hyperinsulinemia, obesity, atherosclerosis and related diseases, as well as inflammatory bowel disease (such as Crohn's disease and ulcerative colitis), wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of structure I (which inhibits DP 4) is administered to a human patient in need of treatment.
The conditions, diseases, and maladies collectively referenced to as “Syndrome X” or Metabolic Syndrome are detailed in Johannsson J. Clin. Endocrinol. Metab., 82, 727-734 (1997).
In addition, in accordance with the present invention, a method is provided for treating diabetes and related diseases as defined above and hereinafter as well as any of the other disease states mentioned above, wherein a therapeutically effective amount of a combination of a compound of structure I and one, two, three or more of other types of antidiabetic agent(s) (which may be employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one, two or three or more other types of therapeutic agent(s) is administered to a human patient in need of treatment.
The term “diabetes and related diseases” refers to Type II diabetes, Type I diabetes, impaired glucose tolerance, obesity, hyperglycemia, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, dysmetabolic syndrome, and hyperinsulinemia.
The conditions, diseases and maladies collectively referred to as “diabetic complications” include retinopathy, neuropathy and nephropathy, and other known complications of diabetes.
The term “other type(s) of therapeutic agents” as employed herein refers to one or more antidiabetic agents (other than DP4 inhibitors of formula I), one or more anti-obesity agents, and/or one or more lipid-modulating agents (including anti-atherosclerosis agents), and/or one or more infertility agents, one or more agents for treating polycystic ovary syndrome, one or more agents for treating growth disorders, one or more agents for treating frailty, one or more agents for treating arthritis, one or more agents for preventing allograft rejection in transplantation, one or more agents for treating autoimmune diseases, one or more anti-AIDS agents, one or more anti-osteoporosis agents, one or more agents for treating immunomodulatory diseases, one or more agents for treating chronic inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome and/or one or more agents for treating anorexia nervosa.
The term “lipid-modulating” agent as employed herein refers to agents which lower LDL and/or raise HDL and/or lower triglycerides and/or lower total cholesterol and/or other known mechanisms for therapeutically treating lipid disorders.
In the above methods of the invention, the compound of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the antidiabetic agent or other type therapeutic agent (depending upon its mode of operation) within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 500:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 100:1, more preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 10:1.
Preferred are compounds of formula I wherein R3 is H or alkyl, R1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcyclo alkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxytricyclo alkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, R2 is H or alkyl, n is 0, X is CN, x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1.
Most preferred are preferred compounds of formula I as described above where X is
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00007

and/or wherein the fused cyclopropyl group is identified as
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00008
Thus, preferred compounds of formula I of the invention will include the moiety:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00009
Particularly preferred are the following compounds:
A)
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00010

wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl or hydroxytricycloalkyl;
B)
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00011

wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl or hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl as well as the following:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00012
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE INVENTION
Compounds of the structure I may be generated by the methods as shown in the following reaction schemes and the description thereof.
Referring to Reaction Scheme 1, compound 1, where PG1 is a common amine protecting group such as Boc, Cbz, or FMOC and X1 is H or CO2R9 as set out below, may be generated by methods as described herein or in the literature (for example see Sagnard et al, Tet-Lett., 1995, 36, pp. 3148-3152, Tverezovsky et al, Tetrahedron, 1997, 53, pp. 14773-14792, Hanessian et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett., 1998, 8, p. 2123-2128). Removal of the PG1 group by conventional methods (e.g. (1) TFA or HCl when PG1 is Boc, or (2) H2/Pd/C, TMSI when PG1 is Cbz, or (3) Et2NH when PG1 is (FMOC) affords the free amine 2 Amine 2 may be coupled to various protected amino acids such as 3 (where PG2 can be any of the PG1 protecting groups) using standard peptide coupling conditions (e.g. EDAC/HOAT, i-BuCOCOCl/TEA, PyBop/NMM) to afford the corresponding dipeptide 4. Removal of the amine protecting group PG2 provides compound Ia of the invention where X=H.
In the case where X1═CO2R9 (where R9 is alkyl or aralkyl groups such as methyl, ethyl, t-butyl, or benzyl), the ester may be hydrolyzed under a variety of conditions, for example with aqueous NaOH in a suitable solvent such as methanol, THF, or dioxane, to provide the acid 5. Conversion of the acid group to the primary carboxamide, affording 6, may be effected by activation of the acid group (e.g. employing i-BuOCOCl/TEA or EDAC) followed by treatment with NH3 or an ammonia equivalent in a solvent such as dioxane, ether, or methanol. The amide functionality may be converted to the nitrile group by a variety of standard conditions (e.g. POCl3/pyridine/imidazole or cyanuric chloride/DMF or trifluoroacetic anhydride, THF, pyridine) to give 7. Finally, removal of the PG2 protecting group similar to above provides compound of the invention Ib.
In a different sequence (Scheme 2), compound 1 where X1 is CO2R9 may be saponified to the acid and subsequently amidated as described above to give amide 8. Removal of the PG1 group followed by peptide coupling to 3 affords compound 6, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib.
Alternately, the carboxamide group in 8 may be converted to the nitrile as described above to give compound 9. Deprotection of PG1 affords 10 which may be subject to standard peptide coupling conditions to afford 7, an intermediate in the synthesis of Ib. Compound 10 may also be generated by oxidation of the amine 2 (e.g. NCS) followed by hydrolysis and subsequent cyanide treatment. Compound 10 may be obtained as a mixture of stereoisomers or a single isomer/diastereomer which may be epimerized (employing conventional procedures) to afford a mixture of stereoisomers.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00013
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00014
In a like manner, β-amino acids such as
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00015

may be coupled with 2, the free amine of 8, or 10 to give the corresponding amides which may be converted to the β-amino acid derivatives of compound Ia or Ib following the same chemistry.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “lower alkyl”, “alkyl” or “alk” as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes both straight and branched chain hydrocarbons, containing 1 to 20 carbons, preferably 1 to 10 carbons, more preferably 1 to 8 carbons, in the normal chain, such as methyl, ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl, t-butyl, isobutyl, pentyl, hexyl, isohexyl, heptyl, 4,4-dimethylpentyl, octyl, 2,2,4-trimethyl-pentyl, nonyl, decyl, undecyl, dodecyl, the various branched chain isomers thereof, and the like as well as such groups including 1 to 4 substituents such as halo, for example F, Br, Cl or I or CF3, alkyl, alkoxy, aryl, aryloxy, aryl(aryl) or diaryl, arylalkyl, arylalkyloxy, alkenyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkylalkyloxy, amino, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, acyl, heteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkoxy, aryloxyalkyl, alkylthio, arylalkylthio, aryloxyaryl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, arylcarbonylamino, nitro, cyano, thiol, haloalkyl, trihaloalkyl and/or alkylthio.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “cycloalkyl” as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes saturated or partially unsaturated (containing 1 or 2 double bonds) cyclic hydrocarbon groups containing 1 to 3 rings, including monocyclic alkyl, bicyclic alkyl (or bicycloalkyl) and tricyclic alkyl (tricycloalkyl), containing a total of 3 to 20 carbons forming the ring, preferably 3 to 10 carbons, forming the ring and which may be fused to 1 or 2 aromatic rings as described for aryl, which includes cyclopropyl, cyclobutyl, cyclopentyl, cyclohexyl, cycloheptyl, cyclooctyl, cyclodecyl and cyclododecyl, cyclohexenyl, adamantyl,
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00016

any of which groups may be optionally subsituted with 1 to 4 substituents such as halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, hydroxy, aryl, aryloxy, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkylamido, alkanoylamino, oxo, acyl, arylcarbonylamino, amino, nitro, cyano, thiol and/or alkylthio and/or any of the substituents for alkyl.
The term “cycloalkenyl” as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to cyclic hydrocarbons containing 3 to 12 carbons, preferably 5 to 10 carbons and 1 or 2 double bonds. Exemplary cycloalkenyl groups include cyclopentenyl, cyclohexenyl, cycloheptenyl, cyclooctenyl, cyclohexadienyl, and cycloheptadienyl, which may be optionally substituted as defined for cycloalkyl.
The term “cycloalkylene” as employed herein refers to a “cycloalkyl” group which includes free bonds and thus is a linking group such as
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00017

and the like, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for “cycloalkyl”.
The term “alkanoyl” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to alkyl linked to a carbonyl group.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “lower alkenyl” or “alkenyl” as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons, and more preferably 1 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one to six double bonds in the normal chain, such as vinyl, 2-propenyl, 3-butenyl, 2-butenyl, 4-pentenyl, 3-pentenyl, 2-hexenyl, 3-hexenyl, 2-heptenyl, 3-heptenyl, 4-heptenyl, 3-octenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-decenyl, 3-undecenyl, 4-dodecenyl, 4,8,12-tetradecatrienyl, and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, amino, hydroxy, heteroaryl, cycloheteroalkyl, alkanoylamino, alkylamido, arylcarbonyl-amino, nitro, cyano, thiol, alkylthio and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “lower alkynyl” or “alkynyl” as used herein by itself or as part of another group refers to straight or branched chain radicals of 2 to 20 carbons, preferably 2 to 12 carbons and more preferably 2 to 8 carbons in the normal chain, which include one triple bond in the normal chain, such as 2-propynyl, 3-butynyl, 2-butynyl, 4-pentynyl, 3-pentynyl, 2-hexynyl, 3-hexynyl, 2-heptynyl, 3-heptynyl, 4-heptynyl, 3-octenyl, 3-nonenyl, 4-decenyl,3-undecenyl, 4-dodecenyl and the like, and which may be optionally substituted with 1 to 4 substituents, namely, halogen, haloalkyl, alkyl, alkoxy, alkenyl, alkynyl, aryl, arylalkyl, cycloalkyl, amino, heteroaryl, cycloheteroalkyl, hydroxy, alkanoylamino, alkylamido, arylcarbonylamino, nitro, cyano, thiol, and/or alkylthio, and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
The terms “arylalkenyl” and “arylalkynyl” as used alone or as part of another group refer to alkenyl and alkynyl groups as described above having an aryl substituent.
Where alkyl groups as defined above have single bonds for attachment to other groups at two different carbon atoms, they are termed “alkylene” groups and may optionally be substituted as defined above for “alkyl”.
Where alkenyl groups as defined above and alkynyl groups as defined above, respectively, have single bonds for attachment at two different carbon atoms, they are termed “alkenylene groups” and “alkynylene groups”, respectively, and may optionally be substituted as defined above for “alkenyl” and “alkynyl”.
The term “halogen” or “halo” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to chlorine, bromine, fluorine, and iodine as well as CF3, with chlorine or fluorine being preferred.
The term “metal ion” refers to alkali metal ions such as sodium, potassium or lithium and alkaline earth metal ions such as magnesium and calcium, as well as zinc and aluminum.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “aryl” as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to monocyclic and bicyclic aromatic groups containing 6 to 10 carbons in the ring portion (such as phenyl or naphthyl including 1-naphthyl and 2-naphthyl) and may optionally include one to three additional rings fused to a carbocyclic ring or a heterocyclic ring (such as aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl rings for example
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00018

and may be optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, or 3 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, haloalkyl, alkyl, haloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, alkenyl, trifluoromethyl, trifluoromethoxy, alkynyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, arylalkyl, aryloxy, aryloxyalkyl, arylalkoxy, arylthio, arylazo, heteroarylalkyl, heteroarylalkenyl, heteroarylheteroaryl, heteroaryloxy, hydroxy, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino wherein the amino includes 1 or 2 substituents (which are alkyl, aryl or any of the other aryl compounds mentioned in the definitions), thiol, alkylthio, arylthio, heteroarylthio, arylthioalkyl, alkoxyarylthio, alkylcarbonyl, arylcarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, arylaminocarbonyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, arylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, arylsulfinyl, arylsulfinylalkyl, arylsulfonylamino or arylsulfon-aminocarbonyl and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “lower alkoxy”, “alkoxy”, “aryloxy” or “aralkoxy” as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to an oxygen atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “substituted amino” as employed herein alone or as part of another group refers to amino substituted with one or two substituents, which may be the same or different, such as alkyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl haloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, alkoxyalkyl or thioalkyl. These substituents may be further substituted with any of the R1 groups or substituents for R1 as set out above. In addition, the amino substituents may be taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they are attached to form 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, 1-azepinyl, 4-morpholinyl, 4-thiamorpholinyl, 1-piperazinyl, 4-alkyl-1-piperazinyl, 4-arylalkyl-1-piperazinyl, 4-diarylalkyl-1-piperazinyl, 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, or 1-azepinyl, optionally substituted with alkyl, alkoxy, alkylthio, halo, trifluoromethyl or hydroxy.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “lower alkylthio”, “alkylthio”, “arylthio” or “aralkylthio” as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aralkyl or aryl groups linked to a sulfur atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “lower alkylamino”, “alkylamino”, “arylamino”, or “arylalkylamino” as employed herein alone or as part of another group includes any of the above alkyl, aryl or arylalkyl groups linked to a nitrogen atom.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “acyl” as employed herein by itself or part of another group, as defined herein, refers to an organic radical linked to a carbonyl
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00019

group; examples of acyl groups include any of the R1 groups attached to a carbonyl, such as alkanoyl, alkenoyl, aroyl, aralkanoyl, heteroaroyl, cycloalkanoyl, cycloheteroalkanoyl and the like.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “cycloheteroalkyl” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a 5-, 6- or 7-membered saturated or partially unsaturated ring which includes 1 to 2 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen and/or sulfur, linked through a carbon atom or a heteroatom, where possible, optionally via the linker (CH2)r (where r is 1, 2 or 3), such as:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00020

and the like. The above groups may include 1 to 4 substituents such as alkyl, halo, oxo and/or any of the alkyl substituents set out herein. In addition, any of the cycloheteroalkyl rings can be fused to a cycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring.
Unless otherwise indicated, the term “heteroaryl” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a 5- or 6-membered aromatic ring which includes 1, 2, 3 or 4 hetero atoms such as nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur, and such rings fused to an aryl, cycloalkyl, heteroaryl or cycloheteroalkyl ring (e.g. benzothiophenyl, indolyl), and includes possible N-oxides. The heteroaryl group may optionally include 1 to 4 substituents such as any of the substituents set out above for alkyl. Examples of heteroaryl groups include the following:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00021

and the like.
The term “cycloheteroalkylalkyl” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to cycloheteroalkyl groups as defined above linked through a C atom or heteroatom to a (CH2)r chain.
The term “heteroarylalkyl” or “heteroarylalkenyl” as used herein alone or as part of another group refers to a heteroaryl group as defined above linked through a C atom or heteroatom to a —(CH2)r— chain, alkylene or alkenylene as defined above.
The term “polyhaloalkyl” as used herein refers to an “alkyl” group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF3CH2, CF3 or CF3CF2CH2.
The term “polyhaloalkoxy” as used herein refers to an “alkoxy” or “alkyloxy” group as defined above which includes from 2 to 9, preferably from 2 to 5, halo substituents, such as F or Cl, preferably F, such as CF3CH2O, CF3O or CF3CF2CH2O.
All stereoisomers of the compounds of the instant invention are contemplated, either in admixture or in pure or substantially pure form. The compounds of the present invention can have asymmetric centers at any of the carbon atoms including any one or the R substituents. Consequently, compounds of formula I can exist in enantiomeric or diastereomeric forms or in mixtures thereof. The processes for preparation can utilize racemates, enantiomers or diastereomers as starting materials. When diastereomeric or enantiomeric products are prepared, they can be separated by conventional methods for example, chromatographic or fractional crystallization.
Where desired, the compounds of structure I may be used in combination with one or more other types of antidiabetic agents (employed to treat diabetes and related diseases) and/or one or more other types of therapeutic agents which may be administered orally in the same dosage form, in a separate oral dosage form or by injection.
The other type of antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be 1,2,3 or more antidiabetic agents or antihyperglycemic agents including insulin secretagogues or insulin sensitizers, or other antidiabetic agents preferably having a mechanism of action different from DP4 inhibition and may include biguanides, sulfonyl ureas, glucosidase inhibitors, PPAR γ agonists, such as thiazolidinediones, SGLT2 inhibitors, PPAR α/γ dual agonists, aP2 inhibitors, glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors, advanced glycosylation end (AGE) products inhibitors, and/or meglitinides, as well as insulin, and/or glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) or mimetics thereof.
It is believed that the use of the compounds of structure I in combination with 1, 2, 3 or more other antidiabetic agents produces antihyperglycemic results greater than that possible from each of these medicaments alone and greater than the combined additive antihyperglycemic effects produced by these medicaments.
The other antidiabetic agent may be an oral antihyperglycemic agent preferably a biguanide such as metformin or phenformin or salts thereof, preferably metformin HCl.
Where the other antidiabetic agent is a biguanide, the compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to biguanide within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 5:1.
The other antidiabetic agent may also preferably be a sulfonyl urea such as glyburide (also known as glibenclamide), glimepiride (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,379,785), glipizide, gliclazide or chlorpropamide, other known sulfonylureas or other antihyperglycemic agents which act on the ATP-dependent channel of the β-cells, with glyburide and glipizide being preferred, which may be administered in the same or in separate oral dosage forms.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the sulfonyl urea in the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.05:1 to about 5:1.
The oral antidiabetic agent may also be a glucosidase inhibitor such as acarbose (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,904,769) or miglitol (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,639,436), which may be administered in the same or in a separate oral dosage forms.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the glucosidase inhibitor within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.2:1 to about 50:1.
The compounds of structure I may be employed in combination with a PPAR γ agonist such as a thiazolidinedione oral anti-diabetic agent or other insulin sensitizers (which has an insulin sensitivity effect in NIDDM patients) such as troglitazone (Warner-Lambert's Rezulin®, disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,572,912), rosiglitazone (en), pioglitazone (Takeda), Mitsubishi MCC-555 (disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,594,016), Glaxo-Wellcome's GL-262570, englitazone (CP-68722, Pfizer) or darglitazone (CP-86325, Pfizer, isaglitazone (MIT/J&J), JTT-501 (JPNT/P&U), L-895645 (Merck), R-119702 (Sankyo/WL), NN-2344 (Dr. Reddy/NN), or YM-440 (Yamanouchi), preferably rosiglitazone and pioglitazone.
The compounds of structure I will be employed in a weight ratio to the thiazolidinedione in an amount within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
The sulfonyl urea and thiazolidinedione in amounts of less than about 150 mg oral antidiabetic agent may be incorporated in a single tablet with the compounds of structure I.
The compounds of structure I may also be employed in combination with a antihyperglycemic agent such as insulin or with glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) such as GLP-1(1-36) amide, GLP-1(7-36) amide, GLP-1(7-36) (as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,614,492 to Habener, disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference), or a GLP-1 mimic such as AC2993 or Exendin-4 (Amylin) and LY-315902 or LY-307167 (Lilly) and NN2211 (Novo-Nordisk), which may be administered via injection, intranasal, or by transdermal or buccal devices.
Where present, metformin, the sulfonyl ureas, such as glyburide, glimepiride, glipyride, glipizide, chlorpropamide and gliclazide and the glucosidase inhibitors acarbose or miglitol or insulin (injectable, pulmonary, buccal, or oral) may be employed in formulations as described above and in amounts and dosing as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference (PDR).
Where present, metformin or salt thereof may be employed in amounts within the range from about 500 to about 2000 mg per day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times daily.
Where present, the thiazolidinedione anti-diabetic agent may be employed in amounts within the range from about 0.01 to about 2000 mg/day which may be administered in single or divided doses one to four times per day.
Where present insulin may be employed in formulations, amounts and dosing as indicated by the Physician's Desk Reference.
Where present GLP-1 peptides may be administered in oral buccal formulations, by nasal administration (for example inhalation spray) or parenterally as described in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,346,701 (TheraTech), 5,614,492 and 5,631,224 which are incorporated herein by reference.
The other antidiabetic agent may also be a PPAR α/γ dual agonist such as AR-HO39242 (Astra/Zeneca), GW-409544 (Glaxo-Wellcome), KRP297 (Kyorin Merck) as well as those disclosed by Murakami et al, “A Novel Insulin Sensitizer Acts As a Coligand for Peroxisome Proliferation—Activated Receptor Alpha (PPAR alpha) and PPAR gamma. Effect on PPAR alpha Activation on Abnormal Lipid Metabolism in Liver of Zucker Fatty Rats”, Diabetes 47, 1841-1847 (1998), and in U.S. application Ser. No. 09/664,598, filed Sep. 18, 2000, (attorney file LA29NP) the disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference, employing dosages as set out therein, which compounds designated as preferred are preferred for use herein.
The other antidiabetic agent may be an SGLT2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. application Ser. No. 09/679,027, filed Oct. 4, 2000 (attorney file LA49NP), which is incorporated herein by reference, employing dosages as set out herein. Preferred are the compounds designated as preferred in the above application.
The other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be an aP2 inhibitor such as disclosed in U.S. application Ser. No. 09/391,053, filed Sep. 7, 1999, and U.S. application Ser. No. 09/519,079, filed Mar. 6, 2000 (attorney file LA27NP), which is incorporated herein by reference, employing dosages as set out herein. Preferred are the compounds designated as preferred in the above application.
The other antidiabetic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor such as disclosed in WO 96/39384, WO 96/39385, EP 978279, WO 2000/47206, WO 99/43663, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,952,322 and 5,998,463, WO 99/26659 and EP 1041068.
The meglitinide which may optionally be employed in combination with the compound of formula I of the invention may be repaglinide, nateglinide (Novartis) or KAD1229 (PF/Kissei), with repaglinide being preferred.
The DP4 inhibitor of formula I will be employed in a weight ratio to the meglitinide, PPAR γ agonist, PPAR α/γ dual agonist, SGLT2 inhibitor, aP2 inhibitor, or glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor within the range from about 0.01:1 to about 100:1, preferably from about 0.1:1 to about 10:1.
The hypolipidemic agent or lipid-modulating agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the compounds of formula I of the invention may include 1,2,3 or more MTP inhibitors, HMG CoA reductase inhibitors, squalene synthetase inhibitors, fibric acid derivatives, ACAT inhibitors, lipoxygenase inhibitors, cholesterol absorption inhibitors, ileal Na+/bile acid cotransporter inhibitors, upregulators of LDL receptor activity, ATP citrate lyase inhibitors, cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitors, bile acid sequestrants, and/or nicotinic acid and derivatives thereof.
MTP inhibitors employed herein include MTP inhibitors disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,595,872, U.S. Pat. No. 5,739,135, U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,279, U.S. Pat. No. 5,760,246, U.S. Pat. No. 5,827,875, U.S. Pat. No. 5,885,983 and U.S. application Ser. No. 09/175,180 filed Oct. 20, 1998, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,962,440. Preferred are each of the preferred MTP inhibitors disclosed in each of the above patents and applications.
All of the above U.S. Patents and applications are incorporated herein by reference.
Most preferred MTP inhibitors to be employed in accordance with the present invention include preferred MTP inhibitors as set out in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,739,135 and 5,712,279, and U.S. Pat. No. 5,760,246 as well as implitapide (Bayer).
The most preferred MTP inhibitor is 9-[4-[4-[[2-(2,2,2-Trifluoroethoxy)benzoyl]amino]-1-piperidinyl] butyl]-N-(2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)-9H-fluorene-9-carboxamide
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00022
The hypolipidemic agent may be an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor which includes, but is not limited to, mevastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,983,140, lovastatin (mevinolin) and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,231,938, pravastatin and related compounds such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,346,227, simvastatin and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,448,784 and 4,450,171. Other HMG CoA reductase inhibitors which may be employed herein include, but are not limited to, fluvastatin, disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,354,772, cerivastatin disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,006,530 and 5,177,080, atorvastatin disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,681,893, 5,273,995, 5,385,929 and 5,686,104, atavastatin (Nissan/Sankyo nisvastatin (NK-104)) disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,011,930, Shionogi-Astra/Zeneca visastatin (ZD-4522) disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,260,440.
The squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, a-phosphono-sulfonates disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,712,396, those disclosed by Biller et al, J. Med. Chem., 1988, Vol. 11, No. 10, pp 1869-1871, including isoprenoid (phosphinyl-methyl) phosphonates as well as other known squalene synthetase inhibitors, for example, as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,871,721 and 4,924,024 and in Biller, S. A., Neuenschwander, K., Ponpipom, M. M., and Poulter, C. D., Current Pharmaceutical Design, 2, 1-40 (1996).
In addition, other squalene synthetase inhibitors suitable for use herein include the terpenoid pyrophosphates disclosed by P. Ortiz de Montellano et al, J. Med. Chem., 1977, 20, 243-249, the farnesyl diphosphate analog A and presqualene pyrophosphate (PSQ-PP) analogs as disclosed by Corey and Volante, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 1976, 98, 1291-1293, phosphinylphosphonates reported by McClard, R. W. et al, J.A.C.S., 1987, 10, 5544 and cyclopropanes reported by Capson, T. L., PhD dissertation, June, 1987, Dept. Med. Chem. U of Utah, Abstracts Table of Contents, pp 16, 17, 40-43, 48-51, Summary.
Other hypolipidemic agents suitable for use herein include, but are not limited to, fibric acid derivatives, such as fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate, bezafibrate, ciprofibrate, clinofibrate and the like, probucol, and related compounds as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 3,674,836, probucol and gemfibrozil being preferred, bile acid sequestrants such as cholestyramine, colestipol and DEAE-Sephadex (Secholex®, Policexide®), as well as lipostabil (Rhone-Poulenc), Eisai E-5050 (an N-substituted ethanolamine derivative), imanixil (HOE-402), tetrahydrolipstatin (THL), istigmastanylphos-phorylcholine (SPC, Roche), aminocyclodextrin (Tanabe Seiyoku), Ajinomoto AJ-814 (azulene derivative), melinamide (Sumitomo), Sandoz 58-035, American Cyanamid CL-277,082 and CL-283,546 (disubstituted urea derivatives), nicotinic acid, acipimox, acifran, neomycin, p-aminosalicylic acid, aspirin, poly (diallylmethylamine) derivatives such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,759,923, quaternary amine poly (diallyldimethylammonium chloride) and ionenes such as disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 4,027,009, and other known serum cholesterol lowering agents.
The other hypolipidemic agent may be an ACAT inhibitor such as disclosed in, Drugs of the Future 24, 9-15 (1999), (Avasimibe); “The ACAT inhibitor, Cl-1011 is effective in the prevention and regression of aortic fatty streak area in hamsters”, Nicolosi et al, Atherosclerosis (Shannon, Irel). (1998), 137(1), 77-85; “The pharmacological profile of FCE 27677: a novel ACAT inhibitor with potent hypolipidemic activity mediated by selective suppression of the hepatic secretion of ApoB100-containing lipoprotein”, Ghiselli, Giancarlo, Cardiovasc. Drug Rev. (1998), 16(1), 16-30; “RP 73163: a bioavailable alkylsulfinyl-diphenylimidazole ACAT inhibitor”, Smith, C., et al, Bioorg. Med. Chem. Lett. (1996), 6(1), 47-50; “ACAT inhibitors: physiologic mechanisms for hypolipidemic and anti-atherosclerotic activities in experimental animals”, Krause et al, Editor(s): Ruffolo, Robert R., Jr.; Hollinger, Mannfred A., Inflammation: Mediators Pathways (1995), 173-98, Publisher: CRC, Boca Raton, Fla.; “ACAT inhibitors: potential anti-atherosclerotic agents”, Sliskovic et al, Curr. Med. Chem. (1994), 1(3), 204-25; “Inhibitors of acyl-CoA:cholesterol O-acyl transferase (ACAT) as hypocholesterolemic agents. 6. The first water-soluble ACAT inhibitor with lipid-regulating activity. Inhibitors of acyl-CoA:cholesterol acyltransferase (ACAT). 7. Development of a series of substituted N-phenyl-N′-[(1-phenylcyclopentyl)methyl]ureas with enhanced hypocholesterolemic activity”, Stout et al, Chemtracts: Org. Chem. (1995), 8(6), 359-62, or TS-962 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd).
The hypolipidemic agent may be an upregulator of LD2 receptor activity such as MD-700 (Taisho Pharmaceutical Co. Ltd) and LY295427 (Eli Lilly).
The hypolipidemic agent may be a cholesterol absorption inhibitor preferably Schering-Plough's SCH48461 as well as those disclosed in Atherosclerosis 115, 45-63 (1995) and J. Med. Chem. 41, 973 (1998).
The hypolipidemic agent may be an ileal Na+/bile acid cotransporter inhibitor such as disclosed in Drugs of the Future, 24, 425-430 (1999).
The lipid-modulating agent may be a cholesteryl ester transfer protein (CETP) inhibitor such as Pfizer's CP 529, 414 (WO/0038722 and EP 818448) and Pharmacia's SC-744 and SC-795.
The ATP citrate lyase inhibitor which may be employed in the combination of the invention may include, for example, those disclosed in U.S. Pat. No. 5,447,954.
Preferred hypolipidemic agents are pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin, cerivastatin, atavastatin and ZD-4522.
The above-mentioned U.S. patents are incorporated herein by reference. The amounts and dosages employed will be as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference and/or in the patents set out above.
The compounds of formula I of the invention will be employed in a weight ratio to the hypolipidemic agent (were present), within the range from about 500:1 to about 1:500, preferably from about 100:1 to about 1:100.
The dose administered must be carefully adjusted according to age, weight and condition of the patient, as well as the route of administration, dosage form and regimen and the desired result.
The dosages and formulations for the hypolipidemic agent will be as disclosed in the various patents and applications discussed above.
The dosages and formulations for the other hypolipidemic agent to be employed, where applicable, will be as set out in the latest edition of the Physicians' Desk Reference.
For oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing the MTP inhibitor in an amount within the range of from about 0.01 mg/kg to about 500 mg and preferably from about 0.1 mg to about 100 mg, one to four times daily.
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules, will contain the MTP inhibitor in an amount of from about 1 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 2 to about 400 mg, and more preferably from about 5 to about 250 mg, one to four times daily.
For oral administration, a satisfactory result may be obtained employing an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor, for example, pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin in dosages employed as indicated in the Physician's Desk Reference, such as in an amount within the range of from about 1 to 2000 mg, and preferably from about 4 to about 200 mg.
The squalene synthetase inhibitor may be employed in dosages in an amount within the range of from about 10 mg to about 2000 mg and preferably from about 25 mg to about 200 mg.
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules, will contain the HMG CoA reductase inhibitor in an amount from about 0.1 to about 100 mg, preferably from about 5 to about 80 mg, and more preferably from about 10 to about 40 mg.
A preferred oral dosage form, such as tablets or capsules will contain the squalene synthetase inhibitor in an amount of from about 10 to about 500 mg, preferably from about 25 to about 200 mg.
The other hypolipidemic agent may also be a lipoxygevase inhibitor including a 15-lipoxygenase (15-LO) inhibitor such as benzimidazole derivatives as disclosed in WO 97/12615, 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed in WO 97/12613, isothiazolones as disclosed in WO 96/38144, and 15-LO inhibitors as disclosed by Sendobry et al “Attenuation of diet-induced atherosclerosis in rabbits with a highly selective 15-lipoxygenase inhibitor lacking significant antioxidant properties”, Brit. J. Pharmacology (1997) 120, 1199-1206, and Cornicelli et al, “15-Lipoxygenase and its Inhibition: A Novel Therapeutic Target for Vascular Disease”, Current Pharmaceutical Design, 1999, 5, 11-20.
The compounds of formula I and the hypolipidemic agent may be employed together in the same oral dosage form or in separate oral dosage forms taken at the same time.
The compositions described above may be administered in the dosage forms as described above in single or divided doses of one to four times daily. It may be advisable to start a patient on a low dose combination and work up gradually to a high dose combination.
The preferred hypolipidemic agent is pravastatin, simvastatin, lovastatin, atorvastatin, fluvastatin or cerivastatin.
The other type of therapeutic agent which may be optionally employed with the DP4 inhibitor of formula I may be 1, 2, 3 or more of an anti-obesity agent including a beta 3 adrenergic agonist, a lipase inhibitor, a serotonin (and dopamine) reuptake inhibitor, a thyroid receptor beta drug, an anorectic agent and/or a fatty acid oxidation upregulator.
The beta 3 adrenergic agonist which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be AJ9677 (Takeda/Dainippon), L750355 (Merck), or CP331648 (Pfizer) or other known beta 3 agonists as disclosed in U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,541,204, 5,770,615, 5,491,134, 5,776,983 and 5,488,064, with AJ9677, L750,355 and CP331648 being preferred.
The lipase inhibitor which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be orlistat or ATL-962 (Alizyme), with orlistat being preferred.
The serotonin (and dopoamine) reuptake inhibitor which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be sibutramine, topiramate (Johnson & Johnson) or axokine (Regeneron), with sibutramine and topiramate being preferred.
The thyroid receptor beta compound which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be a thyroid receptor ligand as disclosed in WO97/21993 (U. Cal SF), WO099/00353 (KaroBio) and GB98/284425 (KaroBio), with compounds of the KaroBio applications being preferred.
The anorectic agent which may be optionally employed in combination with a compound of formula I may be dexamphetamine, phentermine, phenylpropanolamine or mazindol, with dexamphetamine being preferred.
The fatty acid oxidation upregulator which may be optionally employed in combination with the compound of formula I can be famoxin (Genset).
The various anti-obesity agents described above may be employed in the same dosage form with the compound of formula I or in different dosage forms, in dosages and regimens as generally known in the art or in the PDR.
The infertility agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of clomiphene citrate (Clomid®, Aventis), bromocriptine mesylate (Parlodel®, Novartis),LHRH analogs, Lupron (TAP Pharm.), danazol, Danocrine (Sanofi), progestogens or glucocorticoids, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for polycystic ovary syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of gonadotropin releasing hormone (GnRH), leuprolide (Lupron®), Clomid®, Parlodel®, oral contraceptives or insulin sensitizers such as PPAR agonists, or other conventional agents for such use which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for treating growth disorders and/or frailty which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of a growth hormone or growth hormone secretagogue such as MK-677 (Merck), CP-424,391 (Pfizer), and compounds disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 09/506,749 filed Feb. 18, 2000 (attorney docket LA26), as well as selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs), which is incorporated herein by reference, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR, where applicable.
The agent for treating arthritis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of aspirin, indomethacin, ibuprofen, diclofenac sodium, naproxen, nabumetone (Relafen®, SmithKline Beecham), tolmetin sodium (Tolectin®, Ortho-McNeil), piroxicam (Feldene®, Pfizer), ketorolac tromethamine (Toradol®, Roche), celecoxib (Celebrex®, Searle), rofecoxib (Vioxx®, Merck) and the like, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
Conventional agents for preventing allograft rejection in transplantation such as cyclosporin, Sandimmune (Novartis), azathioprine, Immuran (Faro) or methotrexate may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
Conventional agents for treating autoimmune diseases such as multiple sclerosis and immunomodulatory diseases such as lupus erythematosis, psoriasis, for example, azathioprine, Immuran, cyclophosphamide, NSAIDS such as ibuprofen, cox 2 inhibitors such as Vioxx and Celebrex, glucocorticoids and hydroxychloroquine, may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention, which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The AIDS agent which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be a non-nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a nucleoside reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a protease inhibitor and/or an AIDS adjunct anti-infective and may be 1, 2, or more of dronabinol (Marinol®, Roxane Labs), didanosine (Videx®, Bristol-Myers Squibb), megestrol acetate (Megace®, Bristol-Myers Squibb), stavudine (Zerit®, Bristol-Myers Squibb), delavirdine mesylate (Rescriptor®, Pharmacia), lamivudine/zidovudine (Combivir™, Glaxo), lamivudine (Epivir™, Glaxo), zalcitabine (Hivid®, Roche), zidovudine (Retrovir®, Glaxo), indinavir sulfate (Crixivan®, Merck), saquinavir (Fortovase™, Roche), saquinovir mesylate (Invirase®, Roche), ritonavir (Norvir®, Abbott), nelfinavir (Viracept®, Agouron).
The above anti-AIDS agents may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
The agent for treating inflammatory bowel disease or syndrome which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of sulfasalazine, salicylates, mesalamine (Asacol®, P&G) or Zelmac®, (Bristol-Myers Squibb), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR or otherwise known in the art.
The agent for treating osteoporosis which may be optionally employed in combination with the DP4 inhibitor of the invention may be 1, 2, or more of alendronate sodium (Fosamax®, Merck, tiludronate (Skelid®, Sanofi), etidronate disodium (Didronel®, P&G), raloxifene HCl (Evista®, Lilly), which may be employed in amounts specified in the PDR.
In carrying our the method of the invention, a pharmaceutical composition will be employed containing the compounds of structure I, with or without another antidiabetic agent and/or other type therapeutic agent, in association with a pharmaceutical vehicle or diluent. The pharmaceutical composition can be formulated employing conventional solid or liquid vehicles or diluents and pharmaceutical additives of a type appropriate to the mode of desired administration. The compounds can be administered to mammalian species including humans, monkeys, dogs, etc. by an oral route, for example, in the form of tablets, capsules, granules or powders, or they can be administered by a parenteral route in the form of injectable preparations. The dose for adults is preferably between 10 and 1,000 mg per day, which can be administered in a single dose or in the form of individual doses from 1-4 times per day.
A typical capsule for oral administration contains compounds of structure I (250 mg), lactose (75 mg) and magnesium stearate (15 mg). The mixture is passed through a 60 mesh sieve and packed into a No. 1 gelatin capsule.
A typical injectable preparation is produced by aseptically placing 250 mg of compounds of structure I into a vial, aseptically freeze-drying and sealing. For use, the contents of the vial are mixed with 2 mL of physiological saline, to produce an injectable preparation.
DP4 inhibitor activity of the compounds of the invention may be determined by use of an in vitro assay system which measures the potentiation of inhibition of DP4. Inhibition constants (Ki values) for the DP4 inhibitors of the invention may be determined by the method described below.
Purification of Porcine Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV
Porcine enzyme was purified as previously described (1), with several modifications. Kidneys from 15-20 animals were obtained, and the cortex was dissected away and frozen at −80° C. Frozen tissue (2000 -2500 g) was homogenized in 12 L of 0.25 M sucrose in a Waring blender. The homogenate then was left at 37° C. for 18 hours to facilitate cleavage of DP-4 from cell membranes. After the cleavage step, the homogenate was clarified by centrifugation at 7000×g for 20 min at 4° C., and the supernatant was collected. Solid ammonium sulfate was added to 60% saturation, and the precipitate was collected by centrifugation at 10,000×g and was discarded. Additional ammonium sulfate was added to the supernatant to 80% saturation, and the 80% pellet was collected and dissolved in 20 mM Na2HPO4, pH 7.4.
After dialysis against 20 mM Na2HPO4, pH 7.4, the preparation was clarified by centrifugation at 10,000×g. The clarified preparation then was applied to 300 mL of ConA Sepharose that had been equilibrated in the same buffer. After washing with buffer to a constant A280, the column was eluted with 5% (w/v) methyl α-D-mannopyranoside. Active fractions were pooled, concentrated, and dialyzed against 5 mM sodium acetate, pH 5.0. Dialyzed material then was flowed through a 100 mL Pharmacia Resource S column equilibrated in the same buffer. The flow through material was collected and contained most of the enzyme activity. Active material again was concentrated and dialyzed into 20 mM Na2HPO4, pH 7.4. Lastly, the concentrated enzyme was chromatographed on a Pharmacia S-200 gel filtration column to removed low molecular weight contaminants. Purity of column fractions was analyzed by reducing SDS-PAGE, and the purest fractions were pooled and concentrated. Purified enzyme was stored in 20% glycerol at −80° C.
Assay of Porcine Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV
Enzyme was assayed under steady-state conditions as previously described (2) with gly-pro-p-nitroanilide as substrate, with the following modifications. Reactions contained, in a final volume of 100 μl, 100 mM Aces, 52 mM TRIS, 52 mM ethanolamine, 500 μM gly-pro-p-nitroanilide, 0.2 % DMSO, and 4.5 nM enzyme at 25° C., pH 7.4. For single assays at 10 μM test compound, buffer, compound, and enzyme were added to wells of a 96 well microtiter plate, and were incubated at room temperature for 5 min. Reactions were started by addition of substrate, The continuous production of p-nitroaniline was measured at 405 nM for 15 min using a Molecular Devices Tmax plate reader, with a read every 9 seconds. The linear rate of p-nitroaniline production was obtained over the linear portion of each progress curve. A standard curve for p-nitroaniline absorbance was obtained at the beginning of each experiment, and enzyme catalyzed p-nitroaniline production was quantitated from the standard curve. Compounds giving greater than 50% inhibition were selected for further analysis.
For analysis of positive compounds, steady-state kinetic inhibition constants were determined as a function of both substrate and inhibitor concentration. Substrate saturation curves were obtained at gly-pro-p-nitroanilide concentrations from 60 μM to 3600 μM. Additional saturation curves also were obtained in the presence of inhibitor. Complete inhibition experiments contained 11 substrate and 7 inhibitor concentrations, with triplicate determinations across plates. For tight binding inhibitors with Kis less than 20 nM, the enzyme concentration was reduced to 0.5 nM and reaction times were increased to 120 min. Pooled datasets from the three plates were fitted to the appropriate equation for either competitive, noncompetitive or uncompetitive inhibition.
(1) Rahfeld, J. Schutkowski, M., Faust, J., Neubert., Barth, A., and Heins, J. (1991) Biol. Chem. Hoppe-Seyler, 372, 313-318.
(2) Nagatsu, T., Hino, M., Fuyamada, H., Hayakawa, T., Sakakibara, S., Nakagawa, Y, and Takemoto, T. (1976) Anal. Biochem., 74, 466-476.
The following abbreviations are employed in the Examples and elsewhere herein:
    • Ph=phenyl
    • Bn=benzyl
    • i-Bu=iso-butyl
    • Me=methyl
    • Et=ethyl
    • Pr=propyl
    • Bu=butyl
    • TMS=trimethylsilyl
    • FMOC=fluorenylmethoxycarbonyl
    • Boc or BOC=tert-butoxycarbonyl
    • Cbz=carbobenzyloxy or carbobenzoxy or benzyloxycarbonyl
    • HOAc or AcOH=acetic acid
    • DMF=N,N-dimethylformamide
    • EtOAc=ethyl acetate
    • THF=tetrahydrofuran
    • TFA=trifluoroacetic acid
    • Et2NH=diethylamine
    • NMM=N-methyl morpholine
    • n-BuLi=n-butyllithium
    • Pd/C=palladium on carbon
    • PtO2=platinum oxide
    • TEA=triethylamine
    • EDAC=3-ethyl-3′-(dimethylamino)propyl-carbodiimide hydrochloride (or 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl])-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride)
    • HOBT or HOBT.H2O=1-hydroxybenzotriazole hydrate
    • HOAT=1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole
    • PyBOP reagent=benzotriazol-1-yloxy-tripyrrolidino phosphonium hexafluorophosphate
    • min=minute(s)
    • h or hr=hour(s)
    • L=liter
    • mL=milliliter
    • μL=microliter
    • g=gram(s)
    • mg=milligram(s)
    • mol=mole(s)
    • mmol=millimole(s)
    • meq=milliequivalent
    • rt=room temperature
    • sat or sat'd=saturated
    • aq.=aqueous
    • TLC=thin layer chromatography
    • HPLC=high performance liquid chromatography
    • LC/MS=high performance liquid chromatography/mass spectrometry
    • MS or Mass Spec=mass spectrometry
    • NMR=nuclear magnetic resonance
    • mp=melting point
The following Examples represent preferred embodiments of the invention.
EXAMPLE 1
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00023
Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge; Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128] or with the following modifications. L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester was N-protected as the t-butylcarbamate (Boc20, DMAP or NaH) and then dehydrated to the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester in one pot by carbonyl reduction (triethylborohydride, toluene, −78° C.) followed by dehydration (TFAA, lutidine). The title compound was obtained by cyclopropanation of the 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester (Et2Zn, ClCH2I, 1,2-dichloroethane, −15° C.). A more detailed protocol is as follows;
Synthesis of 4,5-dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester: L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester (200 g, 1.27 mol) was dissolved in 1.2 liters of methylene chloride and treated sequentially with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (297 g, 1.36 mol) and a catalytic DMAP (1.55 g, 0.013 mol) at ambient temperature. After 6 h, the mixture was quenched with saturated brine and the organic phase was dried (Na2SO4) and filtered through a short silica gel column to give 323 g (100%) of N-Boc- L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester. N-Boc-L-pyroglutamic acid ethyl ester (160 g, 0.62 mol) was dissolved in 1 liter of toluene, cooled to −78° C. and treated with lithium triethylborohydride (666 mL of a 1.0 M soln in THF) and added dropwise over 90 minutes. After 3 h, 2,6-lutidine (423 mL, 3.73 mol) was added dropwise followed by DMAP (0.2 g, 0.0016 mol). To this mixture was added TFAA (157 g, 0.74 mol) and the reaction was allowed to come to ambient temperature over 2 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and water and the organics were washed with 3 N HCl, water, aqueous bicarbonate and brine and dried (Na2SO4) and filtered through a silica gel plug to give 165 g of the crude 4,5-dehydroproline ethyl ester that was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 1:5 ethyl acetate:hexanes to give 120 g, 75% of the olefin.
Cyclopropanation of 4,5-dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester: 4,5-Dehydro-L-proline ethyl ester (35.0 g, 0.145 mol) was added to a solution of neat Et2Zn (35.8 g, 0.209 mol) in 1 liter of 1,2-dichloroethane at −15° C. To this mixture was added a dropwise addition of ClCH2I (102 g, 0.58 mol) over 1 h and the mixture stirred at −15° C. for 18 h. The reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous bicarbonate and the solvent was evaporated and the reaction was taken up in EtOAc, washed with brine and purified by silica gel chromatography using a stepwise gradient of from 20% EtOAc/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes to give 17.5 g (50%) of diastereomerically pure step 1 title compound.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00024
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (411 mg, 1.61 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1.5 mL) at rt was added TFA (1.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 and then evaporated and re-evaporated three times to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 433 mg, 100% yield,
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00025
To a stirred solution of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonylisoleucine (372.6 mg, 1.61 mmol) and benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (1.25 g, 2.42 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (6 mL) under nitrogen at rt was added 4-methylmorpholine (NMM) (0.36 mL, 3.2 mmol). After 5 min, a solution of Step 2 compound (433 mg, 1.61 mmol) and NMM (0.27 mL, 2.4 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added. After addition, the reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at room temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (40 mL) and washed with 4% KHSO4(10 mL), aqueous NaHCO3(10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography (1:4 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 530 mg, 89% yield.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00026
To a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (530 mg, 1.44 mmol) in MeOH (4 mL) and H2O (4 mL) at rt was added LiOH—H2O (91 mg, 2.16 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight and evaporated. Water (10 mL) was added to the residue and extracted with Et2O (2×10 mL). The aqueous layer was acidified to ˜pH 4 by adding 4% KHSO4 dropwise. The milky solution was extracted with EtOAc (15 mL×3). Combined EtOAc layers were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound as a white solid, 440 mg, 90% yield.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00027
To a stirred solution of Step 4 compound (300 mg, 0.88 mmol) in THF (6 mL) at −15° C. under nitrogen, was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.12 mL, 1.06 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.13 mL, 0.97 mmol) over 2 min. White precipitate was formed. The reaction mixture was stirred at −15° C. under nitrogen for 25 min and a solution of NH3 in dioxane (8.8 mL, 4.4 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred at −15° C. for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred at rt overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched by 4% KHSO4 to ˜pH 4 and extracted with EtOAc (20 mL×3). The extracts were combined, washed with brine (10 mL) dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash column chromatography (1:1 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a white foam, 268 mg, 90% yield.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00028
To a stirred solution of Step 5 compound (248 mg, 1.38 mmol) and imidazole (94 mg, 1.38 mmol) in dry pyridine (12 mL) at −35° C. under nitrogen was added POCl3 (0.26 mL, 2.76 mmol) dropwise. The reaction mixture was stirred between −35° C. to −20° C. for 1 h and evaporated. CH2Cl2 (10 mL) was added and white precipitates were formed. After filtration, the filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash chromatography (2:5 EtOAc/hexane) to give the title compound as a colorless oil, 196 mg, 88% yield.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00029
To a stirred solution of Step 6 compound (130 mg, 0.4 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (2 mL) at rt was added TFA (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a pre-cooled slurry of NaHCO3 (3.8 g) in H2O (3 mL). The mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (6 mL×5), and the. combined CH2Cl2 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound as a white powder, 77 mg. 57% yield, mp=141-143° C. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=222] for the desired compound.
EXAMPLE 2
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00030
Step 1 title compound was synthesized by following the literature procedure. [Stephen Hanessian, Ulrich Reinhold, Michel Saulnier, and Stephen Claridge; Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8 (1998) 2123-2128.]
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00031
The title compound was prepared from Step 1 compound, employing the same procedure as that described for Example 1, Steps 2-6. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=222] for the desired compound.
EXAMPLE 3
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00032
Step 1 title compound was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Pat. No. 4,183,857.].
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00033
To a stirred solution of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonylisoleucine (231 mg, 1 mmol) and benzotriazol-1-yloxytripyrrolidinophosphonium hexafluorophosphate (780 mg, 1.5 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (6 mL) under nitrogen at rt was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.33 mL, 3 mmol). After 5 min, Step 1 compound (120 mg, 1 mmol) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL), washed with 4.1% KHSO4 (10 mL)), aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL), brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4×20 cm column, 1:3 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 290 mg, 90% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=297] for the desired compound.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00034
The reaction mixture of Step 2 compound (220 mg, 0.74 mmol) and 4 M HCl in dioxane (1.5 mL, 6 mmol) was stirred at rt for 2 h and evaporated under reduced pressure. Et2O was added to the residue and a precipitate was formed. Et2O was decanted and this was done three times. The precipitate was dried in vacuo to give the title compound as a white powder, 130 mg (76% yield), mp 205-206° C. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=197] for the desired compound.
EXAMPLES 4-4A
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00035
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00036
Step 1 title compound, as a 1:1 ratio of enantiomers, was prepared by following the literature procedure. [Willy D. Kollmeyer, U.S. Pat. No. 4,183,857.]
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00037
A slurry of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (92.5 mg, 0.4 mmol), 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide (77 mg, 0.4 mmol) and HOAT (54.4 mg, 0.4 mmol) in ClCH2CH2Cl (0.3 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at rt for 1 h, then Step 1 compound (22 mg, 0.2 mmol) was added, followed by Et3N (0.015 mL, 0.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt over night and then diluted with CH2Cl2 (3 mL), washed with H2O (1 mL), aqueous NaHCO3(1 mL) and brine (1 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4×12 cm column, 2:7 EtOAc/hexane) gave the title compound as a colorless oil, 33 mg, 51% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+322] for the desired compound.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00038
To a stirred solution of Step 2 compound (30 mg, 0.4 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.5 mL) at rt was added TFA (0.5 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a precooled slurry of NaHCO3 (0.8 g) in H2O (1 mL). The mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 mL×5), and combined CH2Cl2 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compounds as a 1:1 ratio of diastereomers, 22 mg, 73% yield. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=222] for the desired compounds.
EXAMPLES 5-5A
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00039
To a solution of Example 4, Step 1 compound (150 mg, 1.39 mmol) in 2-propanol (0.8 mL), was added NaCN (40 mg, 1.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was heated to reflux for 3 h. After cooling to rt, the reaction mixture was evaporated and then slurried in Et2O (5 mL). After filtration, the filtrate was evaporated to give Example 4 Step 1 compounds and Example 5 Step 1 compounds (140 mg, 93%) as a 2:1 mixture of diastereomers, each as a racemic mixture.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00040
A slurry of (S)-N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-isoleucine (595 mg, 2.57 mmol), 1-[(3-(dimethyl)amino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide (493 mg, 2.57 mmol) and 1-hydroxy-7-azabenzotriazole (350 mg, 2.57 mmol) in ClCH2CH2Cl (2 mL) was stirred under nitrogen at rt for 1 h, then Step 1 compound mixture (139 mg, 1.28 mmol) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred under nitrogen at rt overnight and then diluted with CH2Cl2 (30 mL), washed with H2O (10 mL) , saturated aqueous NaHCO3 (10 mL) and brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated. Purification by flash chromatography on silica gel (2.4×20 cm column, 1:3 EtOAc/hexane) gave the Example 4, Step 2 compound (260 mg), and the title compounds (105 mg) as a ratio of 1:1 diastereomers. LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=322] for the desired compounds.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00041
To a stirred solution of Step 2 compounds (104 mg, 0.32 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) at rt was added TFA (1 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The reaction mixture was added slowly to a precooled slurry of NaHCO3 (2 g) in H2O (2 mL). The mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (4 mL×4), and combined CH2Cl2 layers were evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC to give the title compound Example 5 (36 mg) and Example 5A (36 mg). LC/MS gave the correct molecular ion [(M+H)+=222] for the desired compounds.
EXAMPLE 6
General Method A: Parallel array synthesis methods for preparation of inhibitors from commercially available amino acids. As shown in Scheme 3, the ester 11, described in Example 1 Step 1, was saponified to the acid with LiOH in THF/H2O and converted to the amide 12 by treatment with isobutyl chloroformate/NMM followed by ammonia in dioxane. The Boc protecting group was removed under acidic conditions using TFA in methylene chloride to give 13. The TFA salt was coupled to Boc-t-butylglycine using either EDAC/HOBT/DMF or EDAC/DMAP/CH2Cl2 to give 14. The amide was dehydrated to the nitrile 15 using POCl3/imidazole in pyridine at −20° C. and finally deprotected with TFA in CH2Cl2 at ambient temperature to afford the target 16. SCHEME 3, GENERAL METHOD A (EXAMPLES 6-27)
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00042
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00043
To a stirred solution of Example 1 Step 1 compound (1.40 g, 5.49 mmol) in 40 mL of a 1:1 methanol:water solution at rt was added lithium hydroxide (0.20 g, 8.30 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h and then heated to 50° C. for 2 h. The mixture was diluted with equal volumes of ether and water (50 mL) and then acidified with KHSO4 to pH 3. The milky solution was extracted with ether (3×20 mL). The combined ether layers were dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated. The residue was stripped from toluene (2×10 mL) and dried under reduced pressure to give the title compound as a thick syrup, 1.20 g, 96%.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00044
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (1.20 g, 5.28 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at −15° C. under nitrogen was added 4-methylmorpholine (0.71 mL, 6.50 mmol) and then isobutyl chloroformate (0.78 mL, 6.00 mmol) over 5 min. The reaction was stirred at −15° C. for 30 min, cooled to −30° C. and treated with a solution of NH3 in dioxane (50 mL, 25 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at −30° C. for 30 min, warmed to rt and stirred overnight. The reaction mixture was quenched with citric acid solution (pH 4) and extracted with ether (3×50 mL). The combined organic fractions were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated. Purification by flash column chromatography on silica gel with EtOAc gave the Step 2 compound, 1.00 g, 84%.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00045
To a stirred solution of Step 2 compound (0.90 g, 4.00 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (3 mL) at 0° C. was added TFA (3 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred at 0° C. for 18 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to produce title compound in the form of a thick oil, 0.98 g, 100%. The oil gradually solidified upon prolonged standing.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00046
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 3 compound (56 mg, 0.22 mmol), N-tert-butoxycarbonyl-(L)-tert-leucine (53 mg, 0.23 mmol), dimethylaminopyridine (0.11 g, 0.88 mmol), and CH2Cl2 (4 mL). The tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and treated with 1-[(3-(dimethypamino)propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide (84 mg, 0.44 mmol). The mixture was placed in a shaker and vortexed overnight. The product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology SCX column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a SCX ion exchange column and successively washing with CH2Cl2 (5 mL), 30% methanol in CH2Cl2 (5 mL), 50% methanol in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and methanol (10 mL). The product containing fractions were concentrated under reduced pressure to give the desired amide. Further purification by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20×250 mm column gave the title compound, 50 mg (68% yield). Purification conditions: Gradient elution from 30% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min. 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 14 min.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00047
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 4 compound (50 mg, 0.15 mmol), imidazole (31 mg, 0.46 mmol), and pyridine (1 mL). The tube was sealed under nitrogen atmosphere and cooled to −30° C. Slow addition of POCl3 (141 mg, 88 uL, 0.92 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry. The tube was mixed at −30° C. for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated. The product was purified by solid phase extraction using a United Technology silica extraction column (2 g of sorbent in a 6 mL column) by loading the material on a silica column and successively washing with CH2Cl2 (5 mL), 5% methanol in CH2Cl2 (5 mL), 7% methanol in CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and 12% methanol in CH2Cl2 (10 mL). The product containing fractions were pooled and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the title compound, 46 mg, 96%.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00048
An oven-dried 15-mL test tube was charged with Step 5 compound (0.45 mg, 0.14 mmol), CH2Cl2 (1 mL), and TFA (1 mL). The reaction mixture was vortexed for 40 min at rt, diluted with toluene (4 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20×250 mm column to give the Example 6 compound, 14 mg, 35%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 18 min; 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time: 10 min.
Examples 7-27 were prepared from amino acids available from commercial sources according to the procedure in Example 6.
TABLE 1
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00049
Example R [M + H]
7
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00050
302
8
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00051
295
9
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00052
240
10
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00053
222
11
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00054
222
12
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00055
222
13
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00056
208
14
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00057
270
15
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00058
222
16
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00059
206
17
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00060
256
18
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00061
268
19
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00062
220
20
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00063
220
21
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00064
210
22
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00065
262
23
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00066
242
24
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00067
210
25
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00068
281
26
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00069
281
27
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00070
272
EXAMPLE 27
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00071
(2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt (53 mg, 0.22 mmol) was coupled to N-Boc-L-Tyrosine-benzyl ether (82 mg, 0.22 mmol) using PyBop (172 mg, 0.33 mmol) and N-methylmorpholine (67 mg, 0.66 mmol) in 4 mL CH2Cl2. The reaction stirred for 16 h, was taken up in EtOAc, washed with H2O, 1N aqueous HCl, brine, then evaporated and purified by silica gel flash chromatography to give the coupled product (FAB MH+480).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00072
The Step 1 amide was dehydrated to the nitrile using the general method C (which follows Example 29) (FAB MH+462).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00073
The Step 2 benzyl ether was cleaved by catalytic hydrogenolysis using 10% palladium on carbon and 1 atmosphere hydrogen gas in MeOH at rt for 1.5 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated to an oil and taken on without further purification (FAB MH+372).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00074
Step 3 N-[N-Boc-L-Tyrosine-]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide was dissolved in CH2Cl2 and TFA was added at rt. The reaction stirred for 1 h and was evaporated and purified by preparative HPLC as described in general method B (set out following Example 29) to afford the title compound (FAB MH+272).
EXAMPLE 28
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00075
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,4S,5S)-4,5-methano-L-proline carboxylamide, TFA salt described in Example 6 Step 3 compound with N-(tert-butyloxy-carbonylhydroxyvaline. After hydroxyl protection with triethylsilyl chloride and dehydration of the amide with POCl3/imidazole in pyridine and deprotection (N-terminal nitrogen and valine hydroxyl) with TFA using general method C (FAB MH+224), the title compound was obtained.
EXAMPLE 29
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00076
N-Boc-L-homoserine (1.20 g, 5.47 mmol) upon treatment with tert-butyldimethylsilyl chloride (1.67 g, 11.04 mmol) and imidazole (938 mg, 13.8 mmol) in THF (17 mL) was stirred as thick slurry for 48 h under N2. The solvent was evaporated, and the crude material was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL). The resulting solution was stirred at rt for 2 h. The solvent was evaporated, and the crude material was diluted with CH2Cl2 (50 mL) and treated with 0.1N HCl (2×10 mL). The CH2Cl2layer was washed with brine and dried over MgSO4. Removal of the volatiles gave title compound as an oil (1.8 g), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 334 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00077
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (333 mg, 1.0 mmol) in 6 mL of CH2Cl2 was added 1-[3-(dimethylamino)-propyl]-3-ethylcarbodiimide hydrochloride (256 mg, 1.32 mmol). The solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, followed by addition with Example 6 Step 3 amine TFA salt (160 mg, 0.66 mmol) and 4-(dimethylamino)pyridine (244 mg, 2.0 mmol). The solution was then stirred at rt overnight. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and washed sequentially with H2O, 10% citric acid, brine, then dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give the title compound (350 mg) which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 442 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00078
An oven-dried 10-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Step 2 compound (350 mg, 0.79 mmol), imidazole (108 mg, 1.58 mmol), pyridine (3 mL). The flask under argon was cooled to −30° C. Slow addition of POCl3 (0.30 mL, 3.16 mmol) gave after mixing a thick slurry. The slurry was mixed at −30° C. for 3 h and the volatiles evaporated. Dichloromethane (5 mL) was then added and the insoluble solid was removed by filtration. The organic layer was washed with H2O, 10% citric acid, brine and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave crude desired nitrile (330 mg) (LC/Mass, + ion): 424 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00079
Trifluoroacetic acid (3.3 mL) was added to a stirred solution of Step 3 compound (330 mg, 0.58 mmol) in 3.3 mL CH2Cl2. The solution was then stirred at rt for 30 min, a few drops of water were added and the mixture mixture stirred for 0.5 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20×100 mm column to give the title compound, 59 mg, 17%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/ 0.1 TFA over 15 min; 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min. (LC/Mass, + ion): 210 (M+H).
General Method B: Claisen rearrangement sequence to Boc-protected amino acids.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00080
General method B affords the quaternary Boc-protected amino acids. Examples 30-47 contain the vinyl sidechain by coupling amino acids of which Scheme 4, compound 20 is representative. Cyclopentanone was olefinated under Horner-Emmons conditions to afford 17 which was reduced to the allylic alcohol 18 using DIBAL-H in toluene −78° C. to rt. Allylic alcohol 18 was esterified with N-Boc glycine using DCC/DMAP in CH2Cl2 to give 19. Glycine ester 19 was subjected to a Lewis acid mediated Claisen rearrangement by complexation with anhydrous zinc chloride and deprotonation at −78° C. with lithium diisopropylamide followed by warming to ambient temperature to afford 20.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00081

Step 1
Cyclopentylideneacetic Acid Ethyl Ester
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing NaH (5.10 g of a 60% dispersion in mineral oil, 128 mmol, 1.10 equiv) in 120 mL anhydrous THF at 0° C. under argon was added triethylphosphonoacetate (25.6 mL, 128 mmol, 1.10 equiv) dropwise through an addition funnel. The mixture was allowed to warm to rt, stirring for an additional 1 h. A solution of cyclopentanone (10.3 mL, 116 mmol) in 10 mL anhydrous THF was added dropwise over 20 min through an addition funnel, and the mixture was allowed to stir at rt for 2.5 h. Ether (200 mL) and water (100 mL) were then added, and the layers were separated. The organic phase was washed successively with water (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure, giving 17.5 g (98%) of the desired ester as a colorless oil.
Step 2
2-Cyclopentylideneethanol
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing cyclopentylideneacetic acid ethyl ester (17.5 g, 113 mmol) in 100 mL anhydrous toluene at −78° C. under argon was added DIBAL-H (189 mL of a 1.5 M solution in toluene, 284 mmol, 2.50 equiv) dropwise over a 30 min period through an addition funnel, and the mixture was then allowed to warm to rt, stirring for 18 h. The reaction mixture was then recooled to −78° C., and quenched by the careful addition of 30 mL anhydrous MeOH. Upon warming to rt, 1 N Rochelle's salt (100 mL) was added, and the mixture was stirred 90 min. The biphasic reaction mixture was then diluted with Et2O (200 mL) in a separatory funnel, and the layers were separated. The organic layer was then washed with brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash column chromatography (silica gel, CH2Cl2/EtOAc, 10:1) gave 11.6 g (92%) of the desired allylic alcohol as a colorless oil.
Step 3
(2-Cyclopentylideneethyl)-N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl) glycinate
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00082
To a flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask containing N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycine (13.45 g, 76.75 mmol) in 100 mL CH2Cl2 at rt was added Step 2 compound 8.61 g, 76.75 mmol, 1.00 equiv) in 20 mL CH2Cl2, followed by dicyclohexylcarbodiimide (16.63 g, mmol, 1.05 equiv) in 80 mL CH2Cl2. To this reaction mixture was then added 4-dimethylaminopyridine (0.94 mg, mmol, 0.10 equiv), and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then filtered through a medium sintered-glass funnel, rinsing with 100 mL CH2Cl2, and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude product was then purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, hexanes/EtOAc, 20:1 to 1:1 gradient) to give 19.43 g (94%) of the desired glycinyl ester as a colorless oil.
Step 4
N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl)(1′vinylcyclopentyl)-glycine
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00083
A flame-dried 500-mL round-bottomed flask under argon was charged with ZnCl2 (11.8 g, mmol, 1.20 equiv) and 20 mL toluene. The mixture was heated under vacuum with vigorous stirring to azeotrope off any traces of moisture with the distilling toluene, repeating this process (2 ×). The flask was then cooled to rt under argon, (2-cyclopentylideneethyl) N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)glycinate (19.36 g, 71.88 mmol) was added via cannula as a solution in 180 mL THF, and the mixture was then cooled to −78° C. In a separate flame-dried 200-mL round-bottomed flask containing diisopropylamine (26.3 mL, mmol, 2.60 equiv) in 90 mL THF at −78° C. was added n-butyllithium (71.89 mL of a 2.5 M solution in hexanes, mmol, 2.5 equiv), and the mixture was allowed to warm to 0° C. for 30 min before recooling to −78° C. The lithium diisopropylamine thus generated was then added via cannula to the ZnCl2 ester mixture dropwise at a steady rate over 40 min, and the resultant reaction mixture was allowed to slowly warm to rt and stir overnight. The yellow reaction mixture was then poured into a separatory funnel, diluted with 300 mL Et2O, and the resultant organic solution was washed successively with 300 mL 1N HCl and 300 mL brine, dried (Na2SO4), and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification by flash chromatography (silica gel, 3% MeOH in CH2Cl2 with 0.5% HOAc) gave 17.8 g (92%) of the desired amino acid product as a white solid. (FAB MH+270).
EXAMPLE 30
General Method C: Peptide coupling to 4,5-methanoprolinamide, amide dehydration and final deprotection.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00084
The TFA salt of amide 13 was coupled to a variety of racemic quaternary protected amino acids using HOBT/EDC in DMF at rt to give a D/L mixture of diastereomers at the N-terminal amino acid. The desired L diastereomer was chromatographically isolated either as the amide 21 or as the nitrile 22. Nitrile 22 was obtained by treatment of the amide with POCl3/imidazole in pyridine at −20° C. The final target 23 was obtained by deprotection under acidic conditions using TFA in CH2Cl2.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00085
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00086
Example 6 Step 3 compound (877 mg, 3.65 mmol) and N-Boc cyclopentylvinylamino acid, described in Step 4 of general method B (1.13 g, 4.20 mmol) were dissolved in 20 mL anhydrous DMF, cooled to 0° C. and to this mixture was added EDAC (1.62 g, 8.4 mmol), HOBT hydrate (2.54 g, 12.6 mmol, and TEA (1.27 g, 12.6 mmol) and the reaction was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 24 h. The reaction mixture was taken up in EtOAc (100 mL), washed with H2O (3×20 mL), dried (Na2SO4), and purified by silica gel flash column chromatography (100% EtOAc) to give 1.38 g (86%) of Step 1 compound (MH+, 378).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00087
Step 1 compound (1.38 g, 3.65 mmol) and imidazole (497 mg, 7.30 mmol) were dried by toluene azeotrope (5 mL×2), dissolved in 10 mL anhydrous pyridine, cooled to −30° C. under nitrogen gas and POCl3 (2.23 g, 14.60 mmol) was added by syringe. The reaction was complete after 1 h and was evaporated to dryness and the remainder purified by two sequential flash column chromatographies over silica gel. The first column (100% EtOAc) was used to isolate the mixture of diastereomers (1.15 g, 88%) from the by-products of the reaction. The second column (gradient of 25% EtOAC/hexanes to 50% EtOAc/hexanes) was run to resolve the mixture of diastereomers and provided 504 mg of the desired Step 2 nitrile (MH+360).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00088
Step 2 compound (32 mg, 0.09 mmol) was dissolved in 1 mL of CH2Cl2 and 1 mL of TFA was added and the reaction stirred for 30 min at rt and was evaporated to dryness. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20×250 mm column to give 12 mg of the TFA salt (lyophilized from water or isolated after evaporation of eluent and trituration with ether) the title compound. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 18 min; 5 min. hold at 90% water/0.1 trifluoroacetic acid. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220.
Examples 30-39 were prepared by the methods outlined in General Method B and General Method C starting from cyclopentanone, cyclobutanone, cyclohexanone, cycloheptanone, cyclooctanone, cis-3,4-dimethylcyclopentanone, and 4-pyranone, cyclopropaneethylhemiacetal, acetone, and 3-pentanone respectively.
TABLE 2
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00089
MS
Example R [M + H]
30
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00090
260
31
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00091
246
32
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00092
274
33
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00093
288
34
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00094
302
35
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00095
288
36
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00096
276
 37*
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00097
232
38
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00098
234
39
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00099
262
*Step 3 compound was prepared by the method described in Tetrahedron Letters 1986, 1281-1284.
EXAMPLE 40
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00100
Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclopentanone and 2-fluorotriethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00101
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C [MS (M+H) 278].
EXAMPLE 41
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00102
Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclobutanone and 2-fluorotriethylphos-phonoacetate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00103
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 264.
EXAMPLE 42
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00104
Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclopentanone and triethylphosphono propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00105
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 274
EXAMPLE 43
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00106
Step 1 compound was prepared employing general method B starting from cyclobutanone and triethylphosphono propionate instead of triethylphosphonoacetate.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00107
Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 1 acid followed by dehydration and final deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
EXAMPLE 44
General Method D: Oxidative cleavage of vinyl substituent by ozonolysis. The protected cyclopentylvinyl nitrile 22 was treated with ozone for 6-8 min and subjected to a reductive quench with sodium borohydride to furnish the hydroxymethyl analog 24 directly. This compound was deprotected under acidic conditions with TFA in CH2Cl2 at 0° C. to give the target compound 25.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00108
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00109
Cyclopentylvinyl compound prepared in Step 2 of general method C (1.28 g, 3.60 mmol) was dissolved in 56 mL of a 2:5 mixture of CH2Cl2:methanol, cooled to —78° C. and was treated with a stream of ozone until the reaction mixture took on a blue color, at which time, NaBH4 (566 mg, 15.0 mmol, 4.2 equiv) was added and the reaction was warmed to 0° C. After 30 min, the reaction was quenched with 2 mL saturated aqueous NaHCO3 and then warmed to rt. The reaction mixture was evaporated to dryness and taken up in EtOAc. A small amount of water was added to dissolve the inorganics and the layers separated. The EtOAc layer was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and evaporated to an oil that was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with EtOAc to give 922 mg (71%) of Step 1 compound. MS(M+H)364.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00110
Step 1 compound (900 mg, 2.48 mmol) was dissolved in 60 mL of CH2Cl2, cooled to 0° C. and treated with 20 mL of freshly distilled TFA. The reaction was complete in 80 min and the mixture was evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative HPLC (YMC S5 ODS 30×100 mm, 18 minute gradient 80% Solv A:Solv B to 100% Solv B, Solvent A=10% MeOH-90%H2O-0.1% TFA, Solvent B=90% MeOH-10% H2O -0.1% TFA, collected product from 5.1-6.5 min) to give, after lyophillization from water, 660 mg (71%) of title compound, TFA salt as a white lyophillate. (MH+264).
EXAMPLE 45
General Method E: Oxidative cleavage of vinyl substituent by osmium tetroxide-sodium periodate followed by sodium borohydride reduction to alcohol. The cyclobutylolefin 26 was treated with osmium tetroxide and sodium periodate in THF:water, 1:1, and the intermediate aldehyde was isolated crude and immediately reduced with sodium borohydride to give 27 in 56% yield. Standard deprotection conditions using TFA afforded the target compound 28.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00111
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00112
N-Boc protected cyclobutylvinyl compound (Example 31, prepared by general method C) (0.16 g, 0.46 mmol) was dissolved in 10 mL of a 1:1 mixture of THF:water and treated with OsO4 (12 mg, catalyst) and NaIO4 (0.59 g, 2.76 mmol, 6 equiv). After 2 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 10 mL of water. The layers were equilibrated and the organic fraction was washed one time with NaHCO3 solution, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give a dark oil. The oil was diluted with 10 mL of methanol and treated with NaBH4 (0.08 g, 2.0 mmol). The mixture turned very dark and after 30 min was diluted with ether and the reaction was quenched with aqueous NaHCO3 solution. The mixture was equilibrated and layers separated. The organic fraction was washed with solutions of NaHCO3 and 0.1 M HCl. The organics were dried (MgSO4) and concentrated to give 90 mg (56%) of the Step 1 compound as a dark oil.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00113
Step 1 compound (90 mg, 0.26 mmol) was dissolved in 3 mL of CH2Cl2, cooled to 0° C. and treated with 3 mL of freshly distilled TFA. The reaction was complete in 80 min and evaporated to dryness and purified by preparative HPLC (YMC S5 ODS 30×100 mm, 10 minute gradient 100%A to 100% B, Solvent A=10% MeOH-90%H20O-0.1% TFA, Solvent B=90% MeOH-10% H2O-0.1% TFA, to give, after removal of water, 50 mg (60%) of title compound. (MH+250).
TABLE 3
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00114
Method of
Example R Preparation [M + H]
44
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00115
Ozonolysis/borohydride 264
45
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00116
Osmium/periodate/ borohydride 250
46
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00117
Ozonolysis/borohydride 278
47
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00118
Osmium/periodate/ borohydride 292
48
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00119
Ozonolysis/borohydride 292
EXAMPLE 49
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00120
Part A. A 50-mL flask was charged with dihydro-4,4-dimethyl-2,3-furandione (5.0 g, 39.0 mmol), acetic acid (10 mL), sodium acetate (3.82 g, 39.0 mmol) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.71 g, 39.0 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 2 h at rt and concentrated under reduced pressure to remove most of the acetic acid. The remainder was poured into water (100 mL) and the aqueous phase extracted with EtOAc (3×40 mL). The organics were dried over Na2SO4 and concentrated to a colorless oil which solidified on standing.
Part B. A 200-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part A solid (@ 39 mmol) and diluted with 80 mL of ethanol and 39 mL of 2N HCl (78 mmol). The mixture was treated with 1.0 g of 5% Pd/carbon and the mixture degassed. The flask was placed under an atmosphere of H2 for 8 h. The mixture was filtered through celite and the filtrate concentrated to an off white solid.
Part C. A 250-mL round bottomed flask was charged with Part B solid and diluted with THF (50 mL) and water (15 mL). The mixture was treated with di-tert-butyldicarbonate (12.7 g, 117 mmol) and sodium bicarbonate (10.0 g, 117 mmol). After 4 h of stirring the mixture was diluted with 50 mL of ether and 50 mL of water. The layers were separated and the organic fraction dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 30% EtOAc in hexanes to give 2.00 g (22% overall) of Step 1 compound as a white solid.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00121
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (1.00 g, 3.80 mmol) in THF (20 mL) at rt under nitrogen was added LiOH hydrate (0.16 g, 3.80 mmol) and then water (5 mL). The reaction was stirred at 40° C. for 0.5 h and then cooled to rt. The mixture was concentrated to dryness and the remainder was stripped from THF (2×), toluene (2×) and THF (1×). The remaining glass was diluted with 5 mL of THF and treated with imidazole (0.63 g, 9.19 mmol) followed by t-butyl-dimethylsilyl chloride (1.26 g, 8.36 mmol). The reaction was stirred overnight and quenched with 10 mL of methanol. After 1 h of stirring the mixture was concentrated. An additional portion of methanol was added and the mixture concentrated. The oil was diluted with ether and 0.1 N HCl (pH 2). The layers were equilibrated and aqueous drawn off. The organic fraction was dried over MgSO4 and concentrated to give 1.25 g (83%) of Step 2 compound as a colorless glass.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00122
The Title compound was prepared by the peptide coupling of Step 2 carboxylic acid with Example 6 Step 3 amine, followed by dehydration and deprotection as outlined in General Method C. MS (M+H) 238.
General Method F: Catalytic Hydrogenation of vinyl substituent. As shown in Scheme 8, the protected vinyl substituted amino acid 20 was transformed to the corresponding saturated analog 29 by catalytic hydrogenation using 10% Pd/C and hydrogen at atmospheric pressure.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00123

Step 1.
The N-(tert-Butyloxycarbonyl)(1′vinylcyclopentyl) glycine (2.23 g, 8.30 mmol) was dissolved in 50 mL MeOH and placed in a hydrogenation vessel purged with argon. To this mixture was added 10% Pd-C (224 mg, 10% w/w) and the reaction stirred under 1 atm H2 at rt for 12 h. The reaction was filtered through celite and concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 1:9 methanol:CH2Cl2 to give the Step 1 compound as a glass. (FAB MH+272)
Examples 50-56 were prepared by the peptide coupling of amino acids (where the vinyl substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.
TABLE 4
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00124
MS
Example R1, R2 [M + H]
50 Cyclopentyl 262
51 cyclobutyl 248
52 cycloheptyl 290
53 4-pyranyl 278
54 methyl, methyl 236
55 ethyl, ethyl 264
56 methyl, ethyl 250
EXAMPLE 57
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00125
The title compound in Example 57 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclobutane amino acid (where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.
EXAMPLE 58
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00126
The title compound in Example 58 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the isopropyl cyclopentane amino acid (where the olefin substituent has been hydrogenated according to general method F) followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 276
General Method G: L-Amino acids synthesized by Asymmetric Strecker Reaction. Commercially available adamantyl carboxylic acid was esterified either in MeOH with HCl at reflux or using trimethylsilyldiazomethane in Et2O/methanol to give 30. The ester was reduced to the alcohol 31 with LAH in THF and then subjected to a Swern oxidation to give aldehyde 32. Aldehyde 32 was transformed to 33 under asymmetric Strecker conditions with KCN, NaHSO3 and R-(−)-2-phenylglycinol. The nitrile of 33 was hydrolyzed under strongly acidic conditions using 12M HCl in HOAc to give 34. The chiral auxiliary was removed by catalytic reduction using Pearlman's catalyst in acidic methanol under 50 psi hydrogen to give 35 and the resulting amino group was protected as the t-butylcarbamate to give 36.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00127
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00128
Adamantane-1-carboxylic acid (10.0 g, 55 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in a mixture of Et2O (160 mL) and MeOH (40 mL), and was treated with trimethylsilyl diazomethane (2.0 M in hexane, 30 mL, 60 mmol, 1.1 equiv) and stirred at rt for 3 h. The volatiles were then removed by rotary evaporation and the product purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5×15 cm) with 40% CH2Cl2/hexanes to give the product as a white crystalline solid (10.7 g, 100%).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00129
Step 1 compound (10.7 g, 0.055 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (150 mL) under argon and was treated with a solution of LiAlH4 (1 M in THF, 69 mL, 69 mmol, 1.25 equiv). After stirring at rt for 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0° C. and quenched sequentially with H2O (5.1 mL), 15% aq NaOH (5.1 mL), and H2O (10.2 mL). After stirring at rt for 15 min, the slurry was vacuum filtered, and the solids washed with EtOAc (2×100 mL). The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation and the resulting solid purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5×15 cm) with 10% EtOAc/CH2Cl2. This afforded the Step 2 product as a white solid (8.74 g, 96%).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00130
An oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with 125-mL addition funnel was charged with anhydrous CH2Cl2 (150 mL) and anhydrous DMSO (10.3 mL, 0.145 mol, 2.5 equiv) under argon atmosphere and cooled to −78° C. Slow dropwise addition of oxalyl chloride (6.7 mL, 0.0768 mol, 1.32 equiv) followed by stirring for 15 min provided an activated DMSO adduct. This was treated with a solution of Step 2 compound (9.67 g, 58.2 mmol, 1 equiv) in dry CH2Cl2 (75 mL) and the reaction allowed to stir for 1 h. The resulting white mixture was then treated dropwise with triethylamine (40.5 mL, 0.291 mol, 5 equiv). After 30 min, the cooling bath was removed, and the reaction quenched sequentially with cold 20% aq KH2PO4 (25 mL) and cold H2O (150 mL). After stirring at rt for 15 min the mixture was diluted with Et2O (400 mL)and the layers were separated. The organics were washed organic with cold 10% aq KH2PO4 (3×150 mL) and satd aq NaCl (100 mL). The organics were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5×10 cm) with CH2Cl2 to give the Step 3 compound as a white solid (9.40 g, 98%).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00131
Step 3 compound (9.40 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) was suspended in H2O (145 mL) and cooled to 0° C. The mixture was treated with NaHSO3 (5.95 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv), KCN (4.0 g, 59 mmol, 1.04 equiv), and a solution of (R)-(−)-phenylglycinol (8.01 g, 57 mmol, 1 equiv) in MeOH (55 mL). The resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h, then refluxed for 16 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and 200 mL of EtOAc added. After mixing for 15 min the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted with EtOAc. The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and the filtrate concentrated. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (6.4×20 cm) with 20% EtOAc/hexanes to give the desired (R,S) product as a white solid (11.6 g, 37.4 mmol, 65%): MS m/e 311 (M+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00132
The Step 4 nitrile (5.65 g, 18 mmol) was heated in conc. HCl (120 mL) and HOAc (30 mL) at 80° C. for 18 h, at which time the reaction was cooled in an ice bath. Vacuum filtration of the resulting precipitate afforded the desired product as a white solid (5.21 g, 14 mmol, 78%). MS m/e 330 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00133
The Step 6 compound (5.21 g, 14 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (50 mL) and HOAc (10 mL), and hydrogenated with H2 (50 psi) and Pearlman's catalyst (20% Pd(OH)2, 1.04 g, 20% w/w) for 18 h. The reaction was filtered through a PTFE membrane filter and the catalyst washed with MeOH (3×25 mL). The filtrate was concentrated by rotary evaporation to afford a white solid. The product was used in Step 7 without further purification.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00134
The crude Step 6 compound (@ 14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (50 mL) under argon and treated with K2CO3 (5.90 g, 42 mmol, 3 equiv) and di-tert-butyldicarbonate (3.14 g, 14 mmol, 1 equiv) under argon at rt. After 19 h, the DMF was removed by rotary evaporation (pump) and the residue dried further under reduced pressure. The residue was mixed with H2O (100 mL) and Et2O (100 mL), the layers separated, and the alkaline aqueous with Et2O (2×100 mL) to remove the by-product from the hydrogenolysis step. The aqueous was cooled to 0° C., diluted with EtOAc (200 mL), and stirred vigorously while care fully acidifying the aqueous to pH 3 with 1N aq HCl. The layers separated and the aqueous extracted with EtOAc (100 mL). The combined EtOAc extracts were washed with brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and the filtrate concentrated by rotary evaporation. The residue was purified by SiO2 flash column (5×12 cm) with 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2+0.5% HOAc. The product was chased with hexanes to afford the product as a white foam (4.07 g, 13 mmol, 92%): MS m/e 310 (m+H)+.
EXAMPLE 59
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00135
The title compound in Example 59 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the Step 7 compound in general method G followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS m/e 300 (m+H)+.
EXAMPLE 60
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00136
A solution of KMnO4 (337 mg, 2.13 mmol, 1.1 equiv) in 2% aq KOH (6 mL) was heated to 60° C. and Step 7 compound in general method G (600 mg, 1.94 mmol, 1 equiv) was added in portions, and heating increased to 90° C. After 1.5 h, the reaction was cooled to 0° C., EtOAc (50 mL) was added, and the mixture was carefully acidified to pH 3 with 1N HCl. The layers were separated and the aqueous was extracted with EtOAc (50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine, dried over Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (3.8×15 cm) with 2% (200 mL), 3% (200 mL), 4% (200 mL), and 5% (500 mL) MeOH/CH2Cl2+0.5% HOAc. After isolation of the product, the material was chased with hexanes to afford a white solid (324 mg, 51%): MS m/e 326 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00137
The Step 1 compound (404 mg, 1.24 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous DMF (10 mL) under argon and cooled to 0° C. The following were added in order: Example 6 Step 3 salt (328 mg, 1.37 mmol, 1.1 equiv), HOBT (520 mg, 3.85 mmol, 3.1 equiv), EDAC (510 mg, 2.61 mmol, 2.1 equiv), and TEA (0.54 mL, 3.85 mmol, 3.1 equiv). The reaction mixture was allowed to warm to rt overnight and the DMF removed by rotary evaporation (pump). The remainder was dried further under vacuum. The residue was dissolved in EtOAc (100 mL), washed with satd aq NaHCO3 (50 mL) and satd aq NaCl (25 mL), dried over anhydrous Na2SO4, filtered and concentrated by rotary evaporation. The product was purified flash column chromatography on silica gel (3.8×15 cm) with a gradient of 6% (200 mL), 7% (200 mL), and 8% (500 mL) MeOH/CH2Cl2 to give the product as a white solid (460 mg, 1.06 mmol, 85%): MS m/e 434 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00138
The Step 2 compound (95 mg, 0.22 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (2.5 mL) under argon and cooled to −78° C. The mixture was treated with diisopropylethylamine (65 μL, 0.37 mmol, 1.7 equiv), and triethylsilyl triflate (75 μL, 0.33 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 h. The reaction was mixed with MeOH (0.5 mL), silica gel (200 mg) and H2O (2 drops) and stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and the residue purified flash column chromatography on silica gel(2.5×10 cm) with 4% MeOH/CH2Cl2 to afford the product (92 mg, 0.17 mmol, 77%): Ms m/e 540 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00139
The Step 3 compound (90 mg, 0.16 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (2 mL) under argon and cooled to −30° C. Treatment with imidazole (24 mg, 0.35 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (66 μL, 0.67 mmol, 4.1 equiv), and continued stirring at −30° C. for 45 min gave a thick slurry. Volatiles were by rotary evaporation and the cake dried further under reduced pressure. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5×10 cm) with 7% EtOAc/CH2Cl2 to afford the product as a white foam (76 mg, 87%): MS m/e 530 (m+H)+
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00140
The Step 4 compound (76 mg, 0.14 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1 mL) and cooled to 0° C. and treated with TFA (1 mL) and H2O (2 drops) and stirred for 1.5 hr at 0° C. The solvents were removed by rotary evaporation and the residue was chased with toluene (5 mL) and dried under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et2O afforded the title compound as a white solid (54 mg, 88%): MS m/e 316 (m+H)+.
EXAMPLE 61
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00141
An oven-dried flask purged with argon was charged with anhydrous CH2Cl2 (3 mL) and cooled to −78° C. Treatment with diethylaminosulfur trifluoride (DAST, 60 μL, 0.45 mmol, 1.5 equiv), followed by a solution of the Example 60 Step 2 compound (131 mg, 0.30 mmol, 1 equiv) in dry CH2Cl2 (3 mL). After 15 min, the reaction was poured into a separatory funnel containing satd aq NaHCO3 (25 mL) and the layers were separated. The aqueous fraction was extracted with CH2Cl2 (25 mL), then the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5×10 cm) with 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2 to give Step 1 compound (124 mg, 0.29 mmol, 94%): MS m/e 436 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00142
The fluorinated amide from Step 1 (161 mg, 0.37 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous pyridine (4 mL) under argon and cooled to −30° C. The mixture was treated with imidazole (54 mg, 0.77 mmol, 2.1 equiv) and phosphorous oxychloride (143 μL, 1.52 mmol, 4.1 equiv) and stirred at −30° C. for 40 min. The solvent was removed by rotary evaporation and dried further under reduced pressure. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (2.5×10 cm) with 5% EtOAc/CH2Cl2 to give the Step 2 compound as a white foam (126 mg, 82%): MS m/e 418 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00143
The Step 2 compound (125 mg, 0.30 mmol) was dissolved in TFA/CH2Cl2 (1:1 v/v, 2 mL), and stirred at rt. After 30 min, the solvents were removed by rotary evaporation, the remainder was chased with toluene (2×5 mL), and the solid dried under reduced pressure. Trituration with Et2O afforded the title compound as a white solid (93 mg, 0.21 mmol, 72%): MS m/e 318 (m+H)+.
EXAMPLE 62
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00144
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 2-adamantanal and elaborated to the homochiral Boc-amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00145
The title compound in Example 62 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 2-adamantyl amino acid described in Step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C.MS (M+H) 300.
EXAMPLE 63
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00146
An oven-dried flask equipped with a condenser and drying tube was charged with norbornane-2-carboxylic acid (4.92 g, 35 mmol, 1 equiv) and treated with bromine (2.1 mL, 41 mmol, 1.15 equiv) and phosphorous trichloride (0.153 mL, 1.8 mmol, 0.05 equiv). The mixture was heated at 85° C. for 7 h protected from light. Additional bromine (0.4 mL, 7.8 mmol, 0.22 equiv) was added with continued heating for 1 h. The mixture was cooled to rt, and Et2O (100 mL) was added. The mixture was washed with 10% aq NaHS03 (50 mL), H2O (2×50 mL), and brine (25 mL). The ether fraction was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated by rotary evaporation. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5×15 cm) with 2% to 4% MeOH/CH2Cl2+0.5% HOAc. The product was chased with hexanes to remove residual HOAc. The isolated material consists of two inseparable materials (4.7 g), which was used without further purification in the next step.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00147
The crude product from above, exo-2-bromonorbornane-1-carboxylic acid (4.7 g, impure) in Et2O (80 mL) and MeOH (20 mL), was mixed with trimethylsilyldiazomethane (2.0 M in hexane, 11.8 mL, 23.6 mol), and stirred at rt for 1 h. Solvent was removed by rotary evaporation, and purification of the oil by flash column chromatography on silica gel (5×18 cm) with a gradient of CH2Cl2/hexanes (600 mL each of 20% and 30%) followed by CH2Cl2 afforded the product as a white solid (3.97 g, 0.017 mol, 79% for 2 steps): MS m/e 233/235 (m+H)+.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00148
Methyl exo-2-bromonorbornane-1-carboxylate (2.0 g, 8.58 mmol, 1 equiv) was dissolved in anhydrous THF (50 mL) in an oven-dried 3-neck flask equipped with a condenser, and purged with argon. The mixture was treated with AIBN (288 mg, 1.71 mmol, 0.2 equiv) and tributyltin hydride (3.6 mL, 12.87 mmol, 1.5 equiv), and then heated to reflux for 2 h. The flask was cooled to rt, and the THF was removed by rotary evaporation to give the crude product. The product was purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel(5×10 cm) with 5% EtOAc/hexanes. The resulting material was used in the next step without further purification.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00149
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 1-norbonyl methyl carboxylate and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00150
The title compound in Example 63 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 1-norbonyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 260.
EXAMPLE 64
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00151
The Step 1 compound was prepared beginning with 4-formylpyran and elaborated to the homochiral Boc amino acid by an asymmetric Strecker synthesis according to general method G.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00152
The title compound in Example 64 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the 4-pyranyl amino acid described in Step 2, followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 250.
General Method H: Strecker Synthesis of Racemic Amino Acids.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00153
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00154
To a stirred solution of 1-phenylcyclo-1-pentanecarboxylic acid (5.00 g, 26.3 mmol) in 25 mL of THF at 0° C. was added LAH (52 mL , 52 mmol, 1M) in THF. The reaction mixture was slowly warmed to rt and then refluxed for 18 h. The reaction was quenched according to the Fieser procedure: careful addition of 2 mL of water; 6 mL of 15% NaOH in water; and 2 mL of water. The biphasic mixture was diluted with 100 mL of ether and the granular white solid filtered off. The ether fraction was dried over Na2SO4 and evaporated to give 4.30 g (93%) of the Step 1 compound.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00155
To a stirred solution of Step 1 compound (0.80 g, 4.50 mmol) in 15 mL of CH2Cl2 at rt was added celite (5 g) followed by PCC (1.95 g, 5.00 mmol). After stirring for 3 h the reaction mixture was diluted with 40 mL of CH2Cl2 and filtered through celite. The filtrate was filtered an additional time through silica gel resulting in a colorless filtrate. The CH2Cl2 fraction was evaporated to give 0.72 g (91%) of the aldehyde as a colorless oil.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00156
To a 50-mL round-bottomed flask containing Step 2 compound (0.72 g, 4.20 mmol) in 8 mL of water at rt was added NaCN (0.20 g, 4.20 mmol) followed by NH4Cl (0.20 g, 5.00 mmol). To this reaction mixture was then added methanol (8 mL) and the mixture was allowed to stir overnight. The reaction mixture was then extracted with ether (2×15 mL), dried (MgSO4) and concentrated under reduced pressure to give the crude Strecker product.
To a 100-mL round-bottomed flask containing the crude Strecker product was added 10 mL of HOAc and 10 mL of conc. HCl. The mixture was refluxed overnight. The mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure to give a yellow solid. The solid was triturated with 5 mL of 1:1 mixture of ether and hexanes. The white solid was treated with triethylamine (1.4 mL, 9.99 mmol) and di-tert-butyldicarbonate (1.00 g, 4.60 mmol) in 50 mL DMF. After 4 h the pH of the mixture was adjusted to 9 with saturated Na2CO3 soln. After an additional 3 h of stirring the mixture was extracted with 1:1 ether and hexanes and the aqueous fraction acidified to pH 2 with 5% KHSO4 solution. The aqueous phase was washed with ether (2×40 mL), the organics dried (MgSO4), and evaporated to an oil that was purified by silica gel flash chromatography with 8:92 methanol:CH2Cl2 to give 0.3 g (23%) of the Boc-protected amino acid as a light oil (M-H, 318).
EXAMPLE 65
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00157
The synthesis of the Step 1 compound was described in general method H for the Strecker synthesis of racemic amino acids.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00158
The title compound in Example 65 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the cyclopentylphenyl amino acid described in Step 1 and general method H followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 310.
EXAMPLE 66
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00159
Step 1 compound was prepared using racemic Strecker synthesis according to general method H starting from 2,2-dimethyl-phenylacetic acid.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00160
The title compound in Example 66 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the dimethylphenyl amino acid described in step 1 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 284.
EXAMPLE 67
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00161
N-(Benzyloxycarbonyl)succinimide (5.6 g, 22.4 mmol) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (25 mL) and the solution was added to a cooled (0° C.) and stirred solution of diethyl aminomalonate hydrochloride (5.0 g, 23.6 mmol) and triethylamine (13.4 mL, 95 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (125 ml). The resulting solution was stirred at 0° C. for 10 min and then at rt for 1 h. The solution was washed with 10% citric acid (2×50 mL),10% sodium hydrogen carbonate (2×50 mL), and water (50 mL) and was then dried (Na2SO4) and evaporated to afford diethyl N-benzyloxycarbonylaminomalonate as a colorless oil, which crystallized upon standing at 0° C. (6.3 g) (LC/Mass + ion): 310 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00162
Step 1 compound (6.18 g, 20 mmol) was dissolved in dry ethanol (30 mL) and added to a solution of sodium ethoxide (2.85 g, 8.8 m mol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol (6 mL). A solution of 3-methyl-2-butenal (1.68 g, 20 mmol) in ethanol (12 mL) was added, and the solution stirred at 25° C. for 24 h. Acetic acid (0.56 mL) was then added the solution hydrogenated at 50 psi for 24 h using 10% Pd/C (2.0 g) as catalyst. The solution was filtered, evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica with CH2Cl2 /EtOAc (9:1) to give 2,2-dicarboethoxy-3,3-dimethyl-pyrrolidine (1.6 g) (LC/Mass, +ion): 244 (M+H).
This diester (850 mg) was refluxed in 5 M hydrochloric acid (10 mL)/TFA (1 mL) for 8 h to give, after evaporation, a powdery white solid. Crystallization from methanol/ether gave 3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline hydrochloride (190 mg) as white crystals mp 110-112° C.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00163
Step 2 compound (173 mg, 0.97 mmol) was dissolved in DMF (3 mL)/water (3 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (0.46 mL, 3.18 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (0.23 g, 1.06 mmol), and the reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 5 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH2Cl2/methanol (9:1) as eluent to yield t-butyloxy-carbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline (200 mg) as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 244 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00164
The title compound in Example 67 was prepared by the peptide coupling of the t-butyloxycarbonyl-3,3-dimethyl-dl-proline amino acid described in Step 3 followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C. MS (M+H) 220.
EXAMPLE 68
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00165
Sodium ethoxide (940 mg of 21 wt % solution in ethanol, 2.9 mmol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added to a stirred solution of diethyl acetamidomalonate (4.31 g, 19,8 mmol) in EtOH (23 mL) at rt under argon. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0° C.; and trans-2-pentenal (1.51 g, 18.0 mmol) was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature at <5° C. After the addition, the reaction was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 4 h, then quenched with acetic acid (460 μl). The solution was concentrated in vacuo, and the residue dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL), washed with 10% NaHCO3 solution (2×5 mL), brine and dried (MgSO4). The solution was filtered and concentrated to a 10 mL volume, then heated to reflux and diluted with hexane (20 mL). Upon cooling to rt, the title compound precipitated and was collected to give 3.0 g (50%) of the Step 1 compound (mp 106-109° C.; LC/Mass: + ions, 324 M+Na).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00166
To a solution of Step 1 compound (2.87 g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25° C. by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h at rt, the solution was concentrated. The residue was diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL) , then treated with H2O (50 mL) and solid Na2CO3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, then concentrated to give the Step 2 compound as a yellow oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass: + ions, 308 M+Na).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00167
Step 2 compound (3.73 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N HCl (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was then cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the title compound (1.2 g, 70.6%) (LC/Mass, + ion): 144 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00168
Step 3 compound (692 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in acetone (12 mL)/ water (12 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solvents were evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica with 1:9 methanol:CH2Cl2 to give the Step 4 compound as an oil (LC/Mass: + ions, 266 M+Na).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00169
Example 68 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 234).
EXAMPLE 69
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00170
Sodium ethoxide (940 mg, 2.9 mmol; 21% w/w solution in ethanol) in ethanol (2 mL) was added to a stirred solution of diethyl acetamidomalonate (4.31 g, 19.8 mmol) in EtOH (23 mL) at rt under argon. The reaction mixture was cooled to 0° C.; and 4-methyl-2-pentenal (1.77 g, 18.0 mmol)was added dropwise maintaining the reaction temperature at <5° C. After the addition, the reaction was allowed to warm to rt, stirred for 4 h, then quenched with acetic acid (460 μl). The solution was concentrated and the remainder dissolved in EtOAc (25 mL). The organics were washed with 10% NaHCO3 solution (2×5 mL), brine and dried (MgSO4). The solution was filtered and concentrated to 10 mL volume, then heated to reflux and treated with hexane (20 mL). On cooling, the Step 1 compound precipitated and was collected (3.3 g) (LC/Mass, + ion): 338 (M+Na).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00171
To a solution of Step 1 compound (3.0g, 9.5 mmol) and triethylsilane (2.28 mL, 14.3 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (30 mL) under argon was added TFA (7.35 mL, 95.3 mmol) dropwise with stirring while maintaining the internal temperature at 25° C., by means of an ice bath. After stirring for 4 h at rt, the solution was concentrated, the residue diluted with CH2Cl2 (100 mL), then treated with H2O (50 mL) and solid Na2CO3 with vigorous stirring until the mixture was basic. The organic layer was separated, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, then concentrated to give the title compound as an oil which was used without further purification (LC/Mass:+ ions, 300 M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00172
Step 2 compound (3.8 g, 9.5 mmol) was suspended in 6 N HCl (20 mL) and HOAc (5 mL) and heated at reflux for 20 h. The reaction mixture was cooled, washed with EtOAc (20 mL), then concentrated to give an oil which crystallized upon trituration with ether to give the step 3 compound (1.4 g, 76.0%). LC/Mass: + ions, 158 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00173
Step 3 compound (728 mg, 3.76 mmol) was dissolved in a 1:1 acetone/water solution (24 mL). To this clear solution was added triethylamine (1.9 mL, 12.8 mmol) and di-t-butyl dicarbonate (928 mg, 4.24 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 18 h. The solution was evaporated and the residue chromatographed on silica column using CH2Cl2/methanol (9:1) as eluent to give the title compound as an oil (LC/Mass, + ion): 258 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00174
Example 69 compound was prepared by peptide coupling of Step 4 amino acid followed by dehydration and deprotection as described in general method C (MS (M+H) 248).
EXAMPLE 70
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00175
Step 1 compound was prepared by the procedure described in General Method C starting from N-Boc-S-t-butylcysteine.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00176
A 25-mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a magnetic stirring bar and N2 inlet was charged with Step 1 compound (78 mg, 0.21 mmol) and chloroform (3 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0° C. and treated with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (85 mg, 0.44 mmol) in CHCl3 (2 mL). After 3 h the solution was diluted with CHCl3 (7 mL), washed with 5% NaHCO3 (2×5 mL), H2O and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave crude sulfoxide (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ions): 384 (M+H).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00177
Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0° C.) solution of Step 2 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2. The solution was then stirred at 0° C. for 1.5 h, diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20×100 mm column to give the title compound of Example 70 , 17 mg, 16%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min (LC/Mass, + ion): 284 (M+H).
EXAMPLE 71
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00178
A 25-mL round-bottomed flask equipped with a magnetic stirring bar and N2 inlet was charged with compound from Example 70, Step 1 (78 mg, 0.21 mmol) in chloroform (3 mL). The mixture was cooled to 0° C. and treated with m-chloroperoxybenzoic acid (144 mg, 0.84 mmol) in CHCl3 (2 mL). After 30 min at rt, the solution was diluted with CHCl3 (7 mL), washed with 5% NaHCO3 (2×10 mL), H2O and dried over Na2SO4. Removal of solvent gave the crude sulfone (100 mg), which was used without further purification (LC/Mass, + ion): 344 (M+H−Bu).
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00179
Trifluoroacetic acid (1.5 mL) was added to a cooled (0° C.) and stirred solution of Step 1 compound (100 mg, 0.26 mmol) in 5 mL CH2Cl2. The solution was stirred at 0° C. for 30 min, diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL) and concentrated under reduced pressure to a thick oil. The product was purified by reverse phase preparative column chromatography on a YMC S5 ODS 20×100 mm column to give the title compound, 14 mg, 17%. Purification conditions: gradient elution from 10% methanol/water/0.1 TFA to 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA over 15 min 5 min hold at 90% methanol/water/0.1 TFA. Flow rate: 20 mL/min. Detection wavelength: 220. Retention Time 10 Min. (LC/Mass, + ion): 300 (M+H).
EXAMPLE 72
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00180
The title compound was prepared following a published procedure (Sasaki et al, Tetrahedron Lett. 1995, 36, 3149, Sasaki et al. Tetrahedron 1994, 50, 7093) used to synthesize (2S,3R,4S)-N-Boc-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxylate. The corresponding amide was prepared by general method A and deprotected with TFA to give the TFA salt also as described in general method A.
EXAMPLE 73
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00181
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-cyclohexylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl3/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+248).
EXAMPLE 74
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00182
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-tert-butylglycine and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl3/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+222).
EXAMPLE 75
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00183
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with L-valine and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl3/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+207).
EXAMPLE 76
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00184
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1′ethylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl3/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using general C (FAB MH+262).
EXAMPLE 77
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00185
The title compound was prepared by coupling (2S,3R,4S)-3,4-methano-L-proline carboxamide-N-trifluoroacetate described in Example 72 with N-(tert-butyloxycarbonyl)-(1′vinylcyclopentyl)glycine described in General Method B and then dehydrated to the amide with POCl3/imidazole and deprotected (N-terminal nitrogen) with TFA using General Method C (FAB MH+260).
EXAMPLE 78
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00186
N-[((S)-cyclopentylvinyl)-N-tert-butoxycarbonylglycinyl]-(2S,4S,5S)-2-cyano-4,5-methano-L-prolylamide (70 mg, 0.19 mmol) described in General Method C, Step 2 was dissolved in a mixture of 2 mL t-BuOH/3 mL THF and N-methylmorpholine-N-oxide (33mg, 0.28 mmol) was added followed by osmium tetroxide (0.1 mmol, 50 mol %). The reaction was quenched with 1 mL of 10% aqueous Na2SO3 and was taken up in EtOAc and washed with H2O 5 mL, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, evaporated and purified by silica gel flash chromatography (5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to give 41 mg (55%) of the protected diol as an oil. The title compound was obtained by deprotection of the amine functionality with TFA according to General Method C (FAB MH+294).
EXAMPLE 79
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00187
General Procedure I: Synthesis of Quaternary Amino Acids Via Michael Addition to Malonates followed by Selective Hydrolysis and Curtius Rearrangement. Examples 79-84.
Cyclohexanone and diethylmalonate underwent Knoevenagel condensation mediated by titanium tetrachloride in THF and CCl4 to give 40. Copper (I) mediated Grignard addition of methylmagnesium bromide gave 41 which was selectively saponified to 42. Curtius rearrangement with trapping by benzyl alcohol gave 43 which was converted to 44 by a standard deprotection-protection protocol. Ester 44 was saponified to give the quaternary amino acid 45.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00188
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00189
According to literature procedure (Tetrahedron 1973, 29, 435), a mixture of dry tetrahydrofuran (400 mL) and dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0° C. (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (22.0 mL, 0.2 mole). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0° C. for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclohexanone (10.3 mL, 0.1 mole) and distilled diethylmalonate (15.2 mL, 0.1 mole) then stirred at 0° C. for 30 min. The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (32 mL, 0.40 mole) in dry THF (60 mL), stirred at 0° C. for 1.0 h, then at rt for 72 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (100 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2×200 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (100 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (100 mL) and brine (100 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 5.25 g (22%). MS (M+Na) 263.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00190
According to literature (Org. Syn. VI, 442, 1988; Liebigs Ann. Chem. 1981, 748) a mixture of 3.0 M methylmagnesium iodide (3.1 mL, 9.36 mmol) and cuprous chloride (9.0 mg) was stirred at 0° C. (ice-salt water bath), treated with a solution of Step 1 compound (1.5 g, 6.24 mmol) in dry ether (1.8 mL) over 5 min and stirred at 0° C. for 1 h, then at rt for 40 min. The mixture was slowly added to a slurry of ice and water (15 mL), treated dropwise with 10% HCl (3.7 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3×25 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with 1% sodium thiosulfate (2.0 mL) and saturated sodium chloride (2.0 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography on a silica gel column using 5% ether in hexane (1.0 L) gave step 2 compound as a clear syrup. Yield: 1.09 g,(68%). MS (M+H)257.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00191
A solution of Step 2 compound (1.09 g, 4.03 mmol) in a mixture of methanol (5.4 mL) and water (2.7 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (4.84 mL, 4.84 mmol or 1.2 equiv) and stirred at rt for 6 days. The reaction mixture still showed the presence of starting material, so THF (4.0 mL) was added and the entire mixture stirred for another 2 days. The solution was evaporated to dryness and the resulting syrup partitioned between water (8.0 mL) and ether (15 mL). The aqueous phase was acidified with 1N hydrochloric acid (4.8 mL) to pH 2-3 and extracted with EtOAc (3 ×25 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with brine (10.0 mL), dried over anhydrous magnesium sulfate, filtered, and concentrated to give step 3 compound as a thick syrup. Yield: 875 mg, (95.1%). MS (M+H) 229.
Or alternately: solutions of the diester in a mixture of ethanol, THF, dioxane and water or mixtures thereof may be hydrolyzed with sodium hydroxide.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00192
According to literature (J. Org. Chem 1994, 59, 8215), a solution of Step 3 compound (0.875 g, 3.83 mmol) in dry benzene (4.0 mL) was treated with triethylamine (0.52 mL, 3.83 mmol) and diphenylphosphoryl azide (0.85 mL, 3.83 mmol), refluxed under nitrogen for 1 h and cooled to rt. The solution was treated with benzyl alcohol (0.60 mL, 5.75 mmol or 1.5 equiv), refluxed for 17 h, cooled then diluted with ether (40 mL). The solution was washed with 10% aqueous citric acid (2×3 mL), back-extracting the citric acid wash with ether (40 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with 5% sodium bicarbonate (2×3 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography on silica gel of the crude product with 10% EtOAc in hexane (1.0 L) gave step 4 compound as a clear thick syrup. Yield: 1.15 g (90%). MS(M+H) 334.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00193
A solution of Step 4 compound (1.15 g, 3.46 mmol) in EtOAc (60 mL) was treated with palladium hydroxide on carbon (298 mg) and hydrogenated at rt for 20 h. The mixture was filtered through a celite pad and then washing the pad well with EtOAc (3×25 mL) then the filtrate was concentrated to give the free amine. A solution of the amine in tetrahydrofuran (12 mL) and water (12 mL) was treated with di-t-butyl dicarbonate (1.0 g, 4.58 mmol or 1.48 equiv) and potassium carbonate (854 mg, 6.18 mmol or 2.0 equiv), then stirred at rt for 20 h. The reaction mixture was partitioned between water (8 mL) and diethyl ether (3×40 mL) and the combined organic extracts were washed with brine (8 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated. Flash chromatography of the crude product with 10% EtOAc in hexane (1 L) gave step 5 compound as a clear thick syrup. Yield: 1.18 g (100%). MS:(M+H) 300.
Other methods can also be employed, for example:
According to Tetrahedron Lett. 1988, 29, 2983, where a solution of the benzylcarbamate in ethanol may be treated with triethylsilane (2 equiv), di-t-butyldicarbonate (1.1 equiv), catalytic palladium acetate and triethylamine (0.3 equiv) to give the BOC-protected amine in a “one-pot” manner.
Or alternately: Solutions of the benzylcarbamate in methanol may be subjected to hydrogenolysis in the present of di-t-butyldicarbonate to give the BOC-protected amine in a “one-pot” manner.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00194
A solution of Step 5 compound (1.18 g, 3.09 mmol) in dioxane (8.0 mL) was treated with 1N sodium hydroxide (9.1 mL, 9.1 mmol or 3.0 equiv) and stirred at 60° C. (oil bath) for 28 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated to a syrup which was dissolved in water (15 mL) and extracted with ether (25 mL). The aqueous phase was acidified to pH 2-3 with 1N hydrochloric acid (9.2 mL) then extracted with EtOAc (3×50 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (10 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered, and concentrated to give Step 6 compound as an off-white solid. Yield: 808 mg (96%). MS (M+H) 272.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00195
The title compound was prepared from Step 6 compound according to the procedure in General Method C where the amino acid was coupled, the amide was dehydrated, and the protecting group removed to give the title compound. MS (M+H) 262.
Compounds 90-100 were prepared by General Method I and General Method C starting from cyclohexanone, cyclopentanone and cyclobutanone, and employing methyl-, ethyl-, allyl- and propylmagnesium halides as Grignard reagents.
TABLE 5
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00196
MS Data
Example # Cycloalkane R M + H
79 cyclohexane Methyl 262
80 cyclohexane Ethyl 276
81 cyclopentane Methyl 248
82 cyclopentane Allyl 274
83 cyclopentane Propyl 276
84 cyclobutane Methyl 234
EXAMPLE 85
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00197
According to Example 79: A mixture of dry carbon tetrachloride (50 mL) was cooled to 0° C. (ice-salt bath) and treated with titanium tetrachloride (11.0 mL, 0.1 mol). The resulting yellow suspension was stirred at 0° C. for 5 min, treated sequentially with cyclopentanone (4.42 mL, 0.05 mol) and distilled diethylmalonate (7.6 mL, 0.05 mol) then stirred at 0° C. for 30 min The reaction mixture was then treated with a solution of dry pyridine (16 mL, 0.20 mol) in dry THF (30 mL), stirred at 0° C. for 1.0 h, then at rt for 20 h. The reaction mixture was quenched with water (50 mL), stirred for 5 min then extracted with ether (2×100 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with saturated sodium chloride (50 mL), saturated sodium bicarbonate (50 mL) and brine (50 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography using 5% EtOAc in hexane gave Step 1 compound as a light yellow oil. Yield: 7.67 g (68%). MS (M+H) 226.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00198
A solution of Step 1 compound (1.00 g 4.42 mmol) in methanol (50 mL) was treated with 10% Pd/C (0.20 g, 10 mol %) and hydrogenated (balloon pressure) at rt for 20 h. The mixture was diluted with methanol and filtered through a pad of celite. The filtrate was concentrated and purified by flash column chromatography on silica gel with 7% EtOAc in hexanes to give 0.84 g (91%) of Step 2 compound. MS (M+H) 229.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00199
The Step 3 compound was prepared by the process outlined in General Method H, where the ester underwent hydrolysis, Curtius Rearrangement, protecting group exchange, and again final ester hydrolysis.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00200
The title compound was prepared from Step 3 compound according to the procedure in General Method C where the amino acid was coupled, the amide was dehydrated, and the protecting group removed to give the title compound. MS (M+H) 234.
Examples 86 and 87 were prepared by the procedures used for Example 85 starting from cyclohexanone and cyclobutanone respectively
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00201
Mass Spec
Example # Cycloalkane M + H
85 cyclopentyl 234
86 cyclohexyl 248
87 cyclobutyl 220
EXAMPLE 89
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00202
Step 1 compound was prepared in Example 6 Step 1.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00203
The title compound was prepared from Step 1 compound according to General Method C, where the carboxylic acid underwent a peptide coupling, the amide dehydration and protecting group removal. MS (M+H) 218.
EXAMPLES 90 TO 99
Examples of compounds where X=H include the following compounds which may be prepared employing procedures as described hereinbefore.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00204
Ex. # n x y R1 R2 R3 R4
90 0 0 1 t-Bu H H
91 0 0 1 adamantyl H H
92 0 0 1
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00205
H H
93 0 0 1
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00206
H Me
94 0 1 0 t-Bu H H
95 0 1 0 adamantyl H H
96 0 1 0
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00207
H H
97 0 1 0
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00208
H Me
98 1 0 1 H H H t-Bu
99 1 1 0 Me H H t-Bu
EXAMPLES 100 TO 109
Examples of compounds where n=1 include the following compounds which may be prepared employing procedures as described hereinbefore.
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00209
Ex. # X x y R1 R2 R3 R4
100 CN 0 1 H H H t-Bu
101 CN 0 1 H H H adamantyl
102 CN 0 1 H Me H
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00210
103 CN 0 1
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00211
H Me H
104 CN 1 0 t-Bu H H H
105 CN 1 0 adamantyl H H Me
106 CN 1 0
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00212
Et H H
107 CN 1 0 H H Me
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00213
108 H 0 1 t-Bu H H H
109 H 1 0 Me H H t-Bu

Claims (43)

What is claimed is:
1. A compound having the structure
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00214
wherein x is 0 or 1 and y is 0 or 1, provided that
x=1 when y=0 and
x=0 when y=1; and wherein
n is 0 or 1;
X is H or CN;
R1, R2, R3 and R4 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, hydroxytricycloalkyl, bicycloalkylalkyl, alkylthioalkyl, arylalkylthioalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl or cycloheteroalkylalkyl; all optionally substituted through available carbon atoms with 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 groups selected from hydrogen, halo, alkyl, polyhaloalkyl, alkoxy, haloalkoxy, polyhaloalkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, polycycloalkyl, heteroarylamino, arylamino, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, hydroxy, hydroxyalkyl, nitro, cyano, amino, substituted amino, alkylamino, dialkylamino, thiol, alkylthio, alkylcarbonyl, acyl, alkoxycarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, alkynylaminocarbonyl, alkylaminocarbonyl, alkenylaminocarbonyl, alkylcarbonyloxy, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkylsulfonylamino, alkylaminocarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, alkylsulfonyl, aminosulfinyl, aminosulfonyl, alkylsulfinyl, sulfonamido or sulfonyl;
and R1 and R3 may optionally be taken together to form —(CR5R6)m— where m is 2 to 6, and R5 and R6 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or R1 and R4 may optionally be taken together to form —(CR7R8)p— wherein p is 2 to 6, and R7 and R8 are the same or different and are independently selected from hydroxy, alkoxy, cyano, H, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkylalkyl, cycloalkenyl, halo, amino, substituted amino, aryl, arylalkyl, heteroaryl, heteroarylalkyl, cycloheteroalkyl, cycloheteroalkylalkyl, alkylcarbonylamino, arylcarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonylamino, aryloxycarbonylamino, alkoxycarbonyl, aryloxycarbonyl, or alkylaminocarbonylamino, or optionally R1 and R3 together with
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00215
 form a 5 to 7 membered ring containing a total of 2 to 4 heteroatoms selected from N, O, S, SO, or SO2;
or optionally R1 and R3 together with
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00216
 form a 4 to 8 membered cycloheteroalkyl ring wherein the cycloheteroalkyl ring has an optional aryl ring fused thereto or an optional 3 to 7 membered cycloalkyl ring fused thereto;
with the proviso that where x is 1 and y is 0, X is H, n is o, and one of R1 and R2 is H and the other is alkyl, then R3 is other than pyridyl or substituted pyridyl;
including all stereoisomers thereof;
andor a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, or a prodrug ester thereof, and all stereoisomers thereof.
2. The compound as defined in claim 1 having the structure:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00217
3. The compound as defined in claim 1 having the structure:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00218
4. The compound as defined in claim 1 having the structure:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00219
5. The compound as defined in claim 1 having the structure:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00220
6. The compound as defined in claim 1 wherein:
R3 is H, R1 is H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl,
R2 is H or alkyl, n is 0,
X is CN.
7. The compound as defined in claim 1 wherein the cyclopropyl fused to the pyrrolidine has the configuration:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00221
8. A compound having the structure:
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00222
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
9. The compound as defined in claim 8 wherein the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is the hydrochloride salt or the trifluoroacetic acid salt.
10. A compound which is
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00223
wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl,
or
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00224
wherein R1 is alkyl, cycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, tricycloalkyl, alkylcycloalkyl, hydroxyalkyl, hydroxycycloalkyl, hydroxyalkylcycloalkyl, hydroxybicycloalkyl, or hydroxytricycloalkyl.
11. A pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound as defined in claim 1 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
12. A pharmaceutical combination comprising a DP4 inhibitor compound as defined in claim 1 and an antidiabetic agent other than a DP4 inhibitor for treating diabetes and related diseases, an anti-obesity agent and/or a lipid-modulating agent.
13. The pharmaceutical combination as defined in claim 12 comprising said DP4 inhibitor compound as defined in claim 1 and an the antidiabetic agent other than a DP4 inhibitor.
14. The combination as defined in claim 13 wherein the antidiabetic agent is 1, 2, 3 or more of a biguanide, a sulfonyl urea, a glucosidase inhibitor, a PPAR γ agonist, a PPAR α/γ dual agonist, an SGLT2 inhibitor, an aP2 inhibitor, a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor, an AGE inhibitor, an insulin sensitizer, a glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1) or mimetic thereof, insulin and/or a meglitinide.
15. The combination as defined in claim 14 wherein the antidiabetic agent is 1, 2, 3 or more of metformin, glyburide, glimepiride, glipyride, glipizide, chlorpropamide, gliclazide, acarbose, miglitol, pioglitazone, troglitazone, rosiglitazone, insulin, G1 -262570, isaglitazone, JTT-501, NN-2344, L895645, YM-440, R-119702, AJ9677, repaglinide, nateglinide, KAD1129, AR-HO39242, GW-409544, KRP297, AC2993, Exendin-4, LY307161, NN2211, and/or LY315902.
16. The combination as defined in claim 13 wherein the compound as defined in claim 1 is present in a weight ratio to the antidiabetic agent within the range from about 0.01 to about 100:1.
17. The combination as defined in claim 12 wherein the anti-obesity agent is a beta 3 adrenergic agonist, a lipase inhibitor, a serotonin (and dopamine) reuptake inhibitor, a thyroid receptor beta compound, an anorectic agent, and/or a fatty acid oxidation upregulator.
18. The combination as defined in claim 17 wherein the anti-obesity agent is orlistat, ATL-962, AJ9677, L750355, CP331648, sibutramine, topiramate, axokine, dexamphetamine, phentermine, phenylpropanolamine, famoxin, and/or mazindol.
19. The combination as defined in claim 12 wherein the lipid modulating agent is an MTP inhibitor, an HMG CoA reductase inhibitor, a squalene synthetase inhibitor, a fibric acid derivative, an upregulator of LDL receptor activity, a lipoxygenase inhibitor, an ACAT inhibitor, a cholesteryl ester transfer protein inhibitor, or an ATP citrate lyase inhibitor.
20. The combination as defined in claim 19 wherein the lipid modulating agent is pravastatin, lovastatin, simvastatin, atorvastatin, cerivastatin, fluvastatin, nisvastatin, visastatin, fenofibrate, gemfibrozil, clofibrate, implitapide, CP-529, 414, avasimibe, TS-962, MD-700, and/or LY295427.
21. The combination as defined in claim 19 wherein the DP4 inhibitor compound as defined in claim 1 is present in a weight ratio to the lipid-modulating agent within the range from about 0.01 to about 100:1.
22. A pharmaceutical combination comprising a DP4 inhibitor compound as defined in claim 1 and an agent for treating infertility, an agent for treating polycystic ovary syndrome, an agent for treating a growth disorder and/or frailty, an anti-arthritis agent, an agent for preventing or inhibiting allograft rejection in transplantation, an agent for treating autoimmune disease, an anti-AIDS agent, an agent for treating inflammatory bowel disease/syndrome, an agent for treating anorexia nervosa, an anti-osteoporosis agent and/or an anti-obesity agent.
23. A method for treating diabetes, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperisulinemia, or elevated blood levels of free fatty acids or glycerol, obesity, Syndrome X, dysmetabolic syndrome, diabetic complications, hypertriglyceridemia, hyperinsulinemia, atherosclerosis, impaired glucose homeostasis, impaired glucose tolerance, infertility, polycystic ovary syndrome, growth disorders, frailty, arthritis, allograft rejection in transplantation, autoimmune diseases, AIDS, intestinal diseases, inflammatory bowel syndrome, nervosa, osteoporosis, or an immunomodulatory disease or a chronic inflammatory bowel disease, which comprises administering to a mammalian species in need of treatment a therapeutically effective amount of a compound as defined in claim 1.
24. The method as defined in claim 23 for treating type II diabetes and/or obesity.
25. A compound that is
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00225
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
26. The compound as defined in claim 25, wherein the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is the hydrochloride salt.
27. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of claim 25 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
28. A pharmaceutical composition comprising the compound of claim 26 and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
29. The composition of claim 27 or 28 further comprising an antidiabetic agent other than a DP4 inhibitor.
30. The composition of claim 29 wherein the antidiabetic agent is metformin.
31. The composition of claim 29, wherein the antidiabetic agent is a SGLT2 inhibitor.
32. A method for treating diabetes, insulin resistance, hyperglycemia, hyperinsulinemia, impaired glucose homeostasis, or impaired glucose tolerance in a mammal comprising administering to the mammal a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound that is
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00226
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
33. The method of claim 32, wherein the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is the hydrochloride salt.
34. The method of claim 32, for treating diabetes.
35. The method of claim 33, for treating diabetes.
36. The method of any one of claim 32, 33, 34, or 35 wherein the pharmaceutical composition further comprises an antidiabetic agent other than a DP4 inhibitor.
37. The method of claim 36, wherein the antidiabetic agent is metformin.
38. The method of claim 36, wherein the antidiabetic agent is a SGLT2 inhibitor.
39. A method for treating type II diabetes in a mammal comprising administering to the mammal a pharmaceutical composition comprising a compound that is
Figure USRE044186-20130430-C00227
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, and a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
40. The method of claim 39, wherein the pharmaceutically acceptable salt is the hydrochloride salt.
41. The method of any one of claims 39 or 40, wherein the pharmaceutical composition further comprises an antidiabetic agent other than a DP4 inhibitor.
42. The method of claim 41, wherein the antidiabetic agent is metformin.
43. The method of claim 41, wherein the antidiabetic agent is a SGLT2 inhibitor.
US13/308,658 2000-03-10 2011-12-01 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method Expired - Lifetime USRE44186E1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/308,658 USRE44186E1 (en) 2000-03-10 2011-12-01 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US18855500P 2000-03-10 2000-03-10
US09/788,173 US6395767B2 (en) 2000-03-10 2001-02-16 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method
US13/308,658 USRE44186E1 (en) 2000-03-10 2011-12-01 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Related Parent Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/788,173 Reissue US6395767B2 (en) 2000-03-10 2001-02-16 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
USRE44186E1 true USRE44186E1 (en) 2013-04-30

Family

ID=22693638

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/788,173 Ceased US6395767B2 (en) 2000-03-10 2001-02-16 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method
US13/308,658 Expired - Lifetime USRE44186E1 (en) 2000-03-10 2011-12-01 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US09/788,173 Ceased US6395767B2 (en) 2000-03-10 2001-02-16 Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Country Status (37)

Country Link
US (2) US6395767B2 (en)
EP (4) EP2995615B1 (en)
JP (5) JP4460205B2 (en)
KR (2) KR100754089B1 (en)
CN (2) CN1213028C (en)
AR (1) AR027634A1 (en)
AT (1) ATE396176T1 (en)
AU (2) AU2001245466B2 (en)
BE (2) BE2010C008I2 (en)
BR (1) BRPI0109115B8 (en)
CA (1) CA2402894C (en)
CO (1) CO5280198A1 (en)
CY (3) CY1108273T1 (en)
CZ (3) CZ307784B6 (en)
DE (3) DE122010000008I1 (en)
DK (1) DK1261586T3 (en)
EG (1) EG25854A (en)
ES (4) ES2456667T3 (en)
FR (1) FR10C0010I2 (en)
HK (2) HK1049330B (en)
HU (5) HU230380B1 (en)
IL (4) IL151372A0 (en)
LU (2) LU91650I2 (en)
MX (1) MXPA02008837A (en)
MY (1) MY124512A (en)
NL (1) NL300436I1 (en)
NO (3) NO324227B1 (en)
NZ (1) NZ520821A (en)
PE (1) PE20020771A1 (en)
PL (1) PL207041B1 (en)
PT (1) PT1261586E (en)
RU (1) RU2286986C2 (en)
SG (1) SG152030A1 (en)
TW (2) TW200624420A (en)
UY (2) UY26613A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2001068603A2 (en)
ZA (1) ZA200206816B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016016770A1 (en) 2014-07-26 2016-02-04 Wockhardt Limited A novel modified release pharmaceutical composition of sitagliptin or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof

Families Citing this family (309)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0487425A (en) * 1990-07-31 1992-03-19 Fujitsu Ltd Circuit switching device
US6414002B1 (en) * 1999-09-22 2002-07-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted acid derivatives useful as antidiabetic and antiobesity agents and method
US6395767B2 (en) * 2000-03-10 2002-05-28 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method
US7622503B2 (en) 2000-08-24 2009-11-24 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Selective androgen receptor modulators and methods of use thereof
US6573287B2 (en) * 2001-04-12 2003-06-03 Bristo-Myers Squibb Company 2,1-oxazoline and 1,2-pyrazoline-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method
KR20040015298A (en) 2001-06-27 2004-02-18 스미스클라인 비참 코포레이션 Fluoropyrrolidines as dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
ES2296962T3 (en) * 2001-06-27 2008-05-01 Smithkline Beecham Corporation PIRROLIDINS AS INHIBITORS OF DIPEPTIDIL PEPTIDASA.
ES2291477T3 (en) * 2001-06-27 2008-03-01 Smithkline Beecham Corporation FLUOROPIRROLIDINS AS INHIBITORS OF DIPEPTIDIL PEPTIDASA.
WO2003043624A1 (en) * 2001-11-16 2003-05-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Dual inhibitors of adipocyte fatty acid binding protein and keratinocyte fatty acid binding protein
US8853266B2 (en) 2001-12-06 2014-10-07 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Selective androgen receptor modulators for treating diabetes
US7772433B2 (en) 2002-02-28 2010-08-10 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation SARMS and method of use thereof
GB0205165D0 (en) 2002-03-06 2002-04-17 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
GB0205176D0 (en) 2002-03-06 2002-04-17 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
GB0205166D0 (en) 2002-03-06 2002-04-17 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
GB0205170D0 (en) 2002-03-06 2002-04-17 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
GB0205175D0 (en) 2002-03-06 2002-04-17 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
GB0205162D0 (en) 2002-03-06 2002-04-17 Astrazeneca Ab Chemical compounds
WO2003097038A1 (en) * 2002-05-14 2003-11-27 Ralph Ryback Method for treating dermatoses and tissue damage
US7405234B2 (en) * 2002-05-17 2008-07-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Bicyclic modulators of androgen receptor function
US7378385B2 (en) * 2002-08-08 2008-05-27 University Of Cincinnati Role for GLP-1 to mediate responses to disparate stressors
US7407955B2 (en) 2002-08-21 2008-08-05 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co., Kg 8-[3-amino-piperidin-1-yl]-xanthines, the preparation thereof and their use as pharmaceutical compositions
US20040121964A1 (en) * 2002-09-19 2004-06-24 Madar David J. Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV)
US7238724B2 (en) * 2002-09-19 2007-07-03 Abbott Laboratories Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV)
US7262207B2 (en) 2002-09-19 2007-08-28 Abbott Laboratories Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV)
AU2003302084A1 (en) * 2002-11-15 2004-06-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Open chain prolyl urea-related modulators of androgen receptor function
US8309603B2 (en) 2004-06-07 2012-11-13 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation SARMs and method of use thereof
US7420079B2 (en) * 2002-12-09 2008-09-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Methods and compounds for producing dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and intermediates thereof
AU2003297219A1 (en) * 2002-12-20 2004-07-22 Merck & Co., Inc. 3-amino-4-phenylbutanoic acid derivatives as dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for the treatment or prevention of diabetes
WO2004087053A2 (en) * 2003-03-25 2004-10-14 Syrrx, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
ATE464889T1 (en) 2003-05-05 2010-05-15 Probiodrug Ag MEDICAL USE OF GLUTAMINYL AND GLUTAMATIC CYCLASE INHIBITORS
EP1620091B1 (en) 2003-05-05 2010-03-31 Probiodrug AG Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase
CN101837127A (en) 2003-05-05 2010-09-22 前体生物药物股份公司 The application of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclase effector
JP2007511467A (en) 2003-05-14 2007-05-10 タケダ サン ディエゴ インコーポレイテッド Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitor
US7459474B2 (en) 2003-06-11 2008-12-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modulators of the glucocorticoid receptor and method
US6995183B2 (en) 2003-08-01 2006-02-07 Bristol Myers Squibb Company Adamantylglycine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods
US7169926B1 (en) 2003-08-13 2007-01-30 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
EP1506967B1 (en) * 2003-08-13 2007-11-21 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7678909B1 (en) 2003-08-13 2010-03-16 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7205409B2 (en) * 2003-09-04 2007-04-17 Abbott Laboratories Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV)
EP1697342A2 (en) * 2003-09-08 2006-09-06 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
JP2007505121A (en) * 2003-09-08 2007-03-08 武田薬品工業株式会社 Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitor
US7371759B2 (en) * 2003-09-25 2008-05-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and method
KR101121882B1 (en) 2003-10-15 2012-04-12 프로비오드룩 아게 Use of effectors of glutaminyl and glutamate cyclases
WO2005049027A2 (en) 2003-11-03 2005-06-02 Probiodrug Ag Combinations useful for the treatment of neuronal disorders
NZ547752A (en) * 2003-11-12 2009-12-24 Phenomix Corp Heterocyclic boronic acid compounds for inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
US7767828B2 (en) * 2003-11-12 2010-08-03 Phenomix Corporation Methyl and ethyl substituted pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
US7576121B2 (en) * 2003-11-12 2009-08-18 Phenomix Corporation Pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
US7317109B2 (en) * 2003-11-12 2008-01-08 Phenomix Corporation Pyrrolidine compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
US20070149451A1 (en) * 2003-11-17 2007-06-28 Holmes David G Combination of a dpp IV inhibitor and an antiobesity or appetite regulating agent
AU2004290897B2 (en) 2003-11-17 2009-02-26 Novartis Ag Use of dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors
US7420059B2 (en) * 2003-11-20 2008-09-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company HMG-CoA reductase inhibitors and method
BRPI0507007A (en) 2004-01-20 2007-06-05 Novartis Ag formulation and direct compression process
US7470810B2 (en) * 2004-01-21 2008-12-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Alkyl and aryl-thiotrifluoroacetates and process
WO2005073186A1 (en) * 2004-01-29 2005-08-11 Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Pyrrolidine derivatives
EP1712547B1 (en) * 2004-02-05 2011-12-14 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Bicycloester derivative
KR101099206B1 (en) 2004-02-05 2011-12-27 프로비오드룩 아게 Novel Inhibitors of Glutaminyl Cyclase
CN1922139B (en) * 2004-02-18 2010-12-29 杏林制药株式会社 Bicyclic amide derivatives
US7501426B2 (en) 2004-02-18 2009-03-10 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh 8-[3-amino-piperidin-1-yl]-xanthines, their preparation and their use as pharmaceutical compositions
US20070238753A1 (en) * 2004-02-27 2007-10-11 Madar David J Pharmaceutical Compositions as Inhibitors of Dipeptidyl Peptidase-IV (DPP-IV)
CA2557275C (en) * 2004-02-27 2012-06-05 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Bicyclo derivative
US7732446B1 (en) 2004-03-11 2010-06-08 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2005095381A1 (en) 2004-03-15 2005-10-13 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
TW200534879A (en) * 2004-03-25 2005-11-01 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Coated tablet formulation and method
TW200538122A (en) * 2004-03-31 2005-12-01 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Process for preparing a dipeptidyl peptidase Ⅳ inhibitor and intermediates employed therein
US7741082B2 (en) 2004-04-14 2010-06-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for preparing dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitors and intermediates therefor
US20050256314A1 (en) * 2004-05-04 2005-11-17 Soojin Kim Process employing controlled crystallization in forming crystals of a pharmaceutical
TW200536827A (en) * 2004-05-04 2005-11-16 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Enzymatic ammonolysis process for the preparation of intermediates for DPP IV inhibitors
US7829720B2 (en) 2004-05-04 2010-11-09 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for preparing atazanavir bisulfate and novel forms
US7214702B2 (en) * 2004-05-25 2007-05-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for producing a dipeptidyl peptidase IV inhibitor
TWI354569B (en) 2004-05-28 2011-12-21 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Coated tablet formulation and method
EP1753730A1 (en) * 2004-06-04 2007-02-21 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US9884038B2 (en) 2004-06-07 2018-02-06 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Selective androgen receptor modulator and methods of use thereof
US9889110B2 (en) 2004-06-07 2018-02-13 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Selective androgen receptor modulator for treating hormone-related conditions
US7572805B2 (en) 2004-07-14 2009-08-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrrolo(oxo)isoquinolines as 5HT ligands
WO2006019965A2 (en) 2004-07-16 2006-02-23 Takeda San Diego, Inc. Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7842707B2 (en) * 2004-07-23 2010-11-30 Nuada, Llc Peptidase inhibitors
TW200608967A (en) 2004-07-29 2006-03-16 Sankyo Co Pharmaceutical compositions containing with diabetic agent
US20060035954A1 (en) * 2004-08-11 2006-02-16 Sharma Padam N Ammonolysis process for the preparation of intermediates for DPP IV inhibitors
AR051446A1 (en) * 2004-09-23 2007-01-17 Bristol Myers Squibb Co C-ARYL GLUCOSIDS AS SELECTIVE INHIBITORS OF GLUCOSE CONVEYORS (SGLT2)
DE102004054054A1 (en) 2004-11-05 2006-05-11 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg Process for preparing chiral 8- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -xanthines
EP2805953B1 (en) 2004-12-21 2016-03-09 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US7635699B2 (en) * 2004-12-29 2009-12-22 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Azolopyrimidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods
US7589088B2 (en) * 2004-12-29 2009-09-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrimidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods
DOP2006000008A (en) * 2005-01-10 2006-08-31 Arena Pharm Inc COMBINED THERAPY FOR THE TREATMENT OF DIABETES AND RELATED AFFECTIONS AND FOR THE TREATMENT OF AFFECTIONS THAT IMPROVE THROUGH AN INCREASE IN THE BLOOD CONCENTRATION OF GLP-1
JP2008024592A (en) * 2005-01-28 2008-02-07 Taisho Pharmaceut Co Ltd Cyanopyrrolidine derivative-containing composition for solid preparation, solid preparation containing the composition and process for producing the solid preparation
ES2319461T3 (en) * 2005-02-10 2009-05-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company DIHYDROQUINAZOLINONES AS MODULATORS OF 5HT.
JP2008115080A (en) * 2005-04-22 2008-05-22 Taisho Pharmaceutical Co Ltd Combined pharmaceutical
US7521557B2 (en) 2005-05-20 2009-04-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrrolopyridine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods
US20060264433A1 (en) * 2005-05-23 2006-11-23 Backes Bradley J Pharmaceutical compositions as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV (DPP-IV)
US7825139B2 (en) * 2005-05-25 2010-11-02 Forest Laboratories Holdings Limited (BM) Compounds and methods for selective inhibition of dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
MY152185A (en) 2005-06-10 2014-08-29 Novartis Ag Modified release 1-[(3-hydroxy-adamant-1-ylamino)-acetyl]-pyrrolidine-2(s)-carbonitrile formulation
AU2006275694A1 (en) * 2005-07-28 2007-02-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted tetrahydro-1H-pyrido(4,3,b)indoles as serotonin receptor agonists and antagonists
DE102005035891A1 (en) 2005-07-30 2007-02-08 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma Gmbh & Co. Kg 8- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -xanthines, their preparation and their use as pharmaceuticals
TW200738245A (en) * 2005-08-22 2007-10-16 Sankyo Co Pharmaceutical composition containing FBPase inhibitor
US7795436B2 (en) * 2005-08-24 2010-09-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Substituted tricyclic heterocycles as serotonin receptor agonists and antagonists
EP1931199A4 (en) 2005-08-31 2009-07-29 Univ Tennessee Res Foundation Treating renal disease, burns, wounds and spinal cord injury with selective androgen receptor modulators
EP1942898B2 (en) * 2005-09-14 2014-05-14 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors for treating diabetes
MY159522A (en) * 2005-09-14 2017-01-13 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co Administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
PE20070622A1 (en) * 2005-09-14 2007-08-22 Takeda Pharmaceutical ADMINISTRATION OF DIPEPTIDYL PEPTIDASE INHIBITORS
TW200745080A (en) * 2005-09-16 2007-12-16 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co Polymorphs of tartrate salt of 2-[2-(3-(R)-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-5-fluoro-6-oxo-6H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethyl]-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
EP1924567B1 (en) * 2005-09-16 2012-08-22 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Process for the preparation of pyrimidinedione derivatives
TW200745079A (en) * 2005-09-16 2007-12-16 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Co Polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
TW200738266A (en) * 2005-09-29 2007-10-16 Sankyo Co Pharmaceutical agent containing insulin resistance improving agent
EP1943215A2 (en) 2005-10-31 2008-07-16 Brystol-Myers Squibb Company Pyrrolidinyl beta-amino amide-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase iv and methods
WO2007054577A1 (en) * 2005-11-14 2007-05-18 Probiodrug Ag Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine derivatives as dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors
GB0526291D0 (en) 2005-12-23 2006-02-01 Prosidion Ltd Therapeutic method
US7915427B2 (en) * 2006-03-08 2011-03-29 Kyorin Pharmaceuticals Co., Ltd. Process for producing aminoacetyl pyrrolidine carbonitrile derivative and intermediate for production thereof
RU2465264C2 (en) * 2006-03-16 2012-10-27 Вертекс Фармасьютикалз Инкорпорейтед Deuterated hepatitis c protease inhibitors
WO2007112347A1 (en) 2006-03-28 2007-10-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
WO2007112368A1 (en) * 2006-03-28 2007-10-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Preparation of (r)-3-aminopiperidine dihydrochloride
US20070238770A1 (en) * 2006-04-05 2007-10-11 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Process for preparing novel crystalline forms of peliglitazar, novel stable forms produced therein and formulations
PE20071221A1 (en) * 2006-04-11 2007-12-14 Arena Pharm Inc GPR119 RECEPTOR AGONISTS IN METHODS TO INCREASE BONE MASS AND TO TREAT OSTEOPOROSIS AND OTHER CONDITIONS CHARACTERIZED BY LOW BONE MASS, AND COMBINED THERAPY RELATED TO THESE AGONISTS
EP2402750A1 (en) * 2006-04-11 2012-01-04 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of using GPR119 receptor to identify compounds useful for increasing bone mass in an individual
WO2007116092A1 (en) 2006-04-12 2007-10-18 Probiodrug Ag Enzyme inhibitors
CN101421238B (en) * 2006-04-17 2013-01-09 住友化学株式会社 Method for producing polycyclic proline derivative or acid addition salt thereof
CN103951667A (en) 2006-05-04 2014-07-30 勃林格殷格翰国际有限公司 Polymorphs
EP1852108A1 (en) 2006-05-04 2007-11-07 Boehringer Ingelheim Pharma GmbH & Co.KG DPP IV inhibitor formulations
PE20080251A1 (en) * 2006-05-04 2008-04-25 Boehringer Ingelheim Int USES OF DPP IV INHIBITORS
US7919598B2 (en) 2006-06-28 2011-04-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Crystal structures of SGLT2 inhibitors and processes for preparing same
EP3147278B1 (en) 2006-07-12 2020-02-12 University of Tennessee Research Foundation Compound for treating breast cancer and progestin-dependent conditions
US9844528B2 (en) 2006-08-24 2017-12-19 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation SARMs and method of use thereof
US9730908B2 (en) 2006-08-24 2017-08-15 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation SARMs and method of use thereof
JP2010502670A (en) 2006-09-07 2010-01-28 ニコメッド ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Combination therapy for diabetes mellitus
US8324383B2 (en) 2006-09-13 2012-12-04 Takeda Pharmaceutical Company Limited Methods of making polymorphs of benzoate salt of 2-[[6-[(3R)-3-amino-1-piperidinyl]-3,4-dihydro-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-1(2H)-pyrimidinyl]methyl]-benzonitrile
DK2073810T3 (en) * 2006-09-13 2011-10-31 Takeda Pharmaceutical Use of 2-6- (3-amino-piperidin-1-yl) -3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethyl-4-fluoro-benzonitrile in the treatment of diabetes, cancer, autoimmune diseases and HIV infection
JO2945B1 (en) * 2006-09-13 2016-03-15 سميث كلاين بيتشام كوربوريشن Methods For Administering Long-lasting Hypoglycemic Agents.
CN101594878A (en) 2006-09-18 2009-12-02 雷普特药品公司 By giving receptor associated protein(RAP) (RAP)-conjugate to the liver treatment of conditions
US8278345B2 (en) 2006-11-09 2012-10-02 Probiodrug Ag Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase
US8217025B2 (en) * 2006-11-17 2012-07-10 Harbor Therapeutics, Inc. Drug screening and treatment methods
TW200838536A (en) * 2006-11-29 2008-10-01 Takeda Pharmaceutical Polymorphs of succinate salt of 2-[6-(3-amino-piperidin-1-yl)-3-methyl-2,4-dioxo-3,4-dihydro-2H-pyrimidin-1-ylmethy]-4-fluor-benzonitrile and methods of use therefor
SI2091948T1 (en) 2006-11-30 2012-07-31 Probiodrug Ag Novel inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase
KR101638035B1 (en) 2007-01-22 2016-07-11 지티엑스, 인코포레이티드 Nuclear receptor binding agents
US9604931B2 (en) 2007-01-22 2017-03-28 Gtx, Inc. Nuclear receptor binding agents
US9623021B2 (en) 2007-01-22 2017-04-18 Gtx, Inc. Nuclear receptor binding agents
CN101230058A (en) * 2007-01-23 2008-07-30 上海恒瑞医药有限公司 Bicycle aza alkyl derivative, preparation method and use in medicine thereof
DK2107905T3 (en) 2007-02-01 2011-01-31 Takeda Pharmaceutical Solid composition comprising alogliptin and pioglitazone
WO2008098256A1 (en) * 2007-02-09 2008-08-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Methods for identifying patients with an increased likelihood of responding to dpp-iv inhibitors
US8093236B2 (en) 2007-03-13 2012-01-10 Takeda Pharmaceuticals Company Limited Weekly administration of dipeptidyl peptidase inhibitors
US20080064701A1 (en) * 2007-04-24 2008-03-13 Ramesh Sesha Anti-diabetic combinations
PE20090185A1 (en) 2007-03-22 2009-02-28 Bristol Myers Squibb Co PHARMACEUTICAL FORMULATIONS CONTAINING AN SGLT2 INHIBITOR
WO2008114857A1 (en) * 2007-03-22 2008-09-25 Kyorin Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Method for producing aminoacetylpyrrolidinecarbonitrile derivative
WO2008120813A1 (en) 2007-04-03 2008-10-09 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corporation Combined use of dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitor compound and sweetener
EP2865670B1 (en) 2007-04-18 2017-01-11 Probiodrug AG Thiourea derivatives as glutaminyl cyclase inhibitors
PE20090696A1 (en) * 2007-04-20 2009-06-20 Bristol Myers Squibb Co CRYSTALLINE FORMS OF SAXAGLIPTIN AND PROCESSES FOR PREPARING THEM
JP2010528023A (en) * 2007-05-18 2010-08-19 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Crystal structure of SGLT2 inhibitor and method for producing the same
CN101318925A (en) * 2007-06-04 2008-12-10 上海恒瑞医药有限公司 Pyrrolidine-tetratomic ring derivants, preparation method and medical uses thereof
EA021544B1 (en) 2007-06-04 2015-07-30 Бен-Гурион Юниверсити Оф Дзе Негев Рисерч Энд Дивелопмент Оторити Tri-aryl compounds and pharmaceutical compositions comprising the same
JP2010530890A (en) * 2007-06-22 2010-09-16 ブリストル−マイヤーズ スクイブ カンパニー Tablet composition containing atazanavir
CN101795674A (en) * 2007-06-22 2010-08-04 百时美施贵宝公司 Tableted compositions containing atazanavir
AU2008268625B2 (en) * 2007-06-22 2013-11-28 Bristol-Myers Squibb Holdings Ireland Unlimited Company Tableted compositions containing atazanavir
CN101801348A (en) * 2007-06-22 2010-08-11 百时美施贵宝公司 tableted compositions containing atazanavir
PE20090938A1 (en) 2007-08-16 2009-08-08 Boehringer Ingelheim Int PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION INCLUDING A BENZENE DERIVATIVE SUBSTITUTED WITH GLUCOPYRANOSIL
NZ600126A (en) * 2007-08-17 2013-12-20 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Purine derivatives for use in the treatment of fap-related diseases
US7968603B2 (en) 2007-09-11 2011-06-28 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Solid forms of selective androgen receptor modulators
US20090076118A1 (en) * 2007-09-13 2009-03-19 Protia, Llc Deuterium-enriched saxagliptin
WO2009037719A1 (en) * 2007-09-21 2009-03-26 Lupin Limited Novel compounds as dipeptidyl peptidase iv (dpp iv) inhibitors
CL2008003653A1 (en) 2008-01-17 2010-03-05 Mitsubishi Tanabe Pharma Corp Use of a glucopyranosyl-derived sglt inhibitor and a selected dppiv inhibitor to treat diabetes; and pharmaceutical composition.
US8551524B2 (en) * 2008-03-14 2013-10-08 Iycus, Llc Anti-diabetic combinations
PE20140960A1 (en) 2008-04-03 2014-08-15 Boehringer Ingelheim Int FORMULATIONS INVOLVING A DPP4 INHIBITOR
EP2108960A1 (en) * 2008-04-07 2009-10-14 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Methods of using A G protein-coupled receptor to identify peptide YY (PYY) secretagogues and compounds useful in the treatment of conditons modulated by PYY
WO2009140685A2 (en) * 2008-05-16 2009-11-19 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Methods for identifying subjects with an increased likelihood of responding to dpp-iv inhibitors
PE20100156A1 (en) * 2008-06-03 2010-02-23 Boehringer Ingelheim Int NAFLD TREATMENT
US8003689B2 (en) 2008-06-20 2011-08-23 Gtx, Inc. Metabolites of selective androgen receptor modulators and methods of use thereof
KR20200118243A (en) 2008-08-06 2020-10-14 베링거 인겔하임 인터내셔날 게엠베하 Treatment for diabetes in patients inappropriate for metformin therapy
UY32030A (en) 2008-08-06 2010-03-26 Boehringer Ingelheim Int "TREATMENT FOR DIABETES IN INAPPROPRIATE PATIENTS FOR THERAPY WITH METFORMIN"
WO2010016584A1 (en) * 2008-08-07 2010-02-11 杏林製薬株式会社 Process for production of bicyclo[2.2.2]octylamine derivative
CN102186474A (en) * 2008-08-14 2011-09-14 杏林制药株式会社 Uchida hiroshi [jp]; fukuda mamoru [jp]; aritomi seigo
MX2011001525A (en) 2008-08-15 2011-03-29 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Purin derivatives for use in the treatment of fab-related diseases.
BRPI0919288A2 (en) 2008-09-10 2015-12-15 Boehring Ingelheim Internat Gmbh combination therapy for treatment of diabetes and related conditions.
US20200155558A1 (en) 2018-11-20 2020-05-21 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Treatment for diabetes in patients with insufficient glycemic control despite therapy with an oral antidiabetic drug
CR20170369A (en) 2008-10-17 2017-11-01 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland COMBINATION OF AN INSULIN AND A GLP-1 AGONIST (Divisional 2011-0188)
US8889618B2 (en) 2008-11-07 2014-11-18 The General Hospital Corporation C-terminal fragments of glucagon-like peptide-1 (GLP-1)
US20100124541A1 (en) * 2008-11-19 2010-05-20 Auspex Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Hydroxyadamantyl inhibitors of dipeptidylpeptidase iv
US20100144140A1 (en) * 2008-12-10 2010-06-10 Novellus Systems, Inc. Methods for depositing tungsten films having low resistivity for gapfill applications
DE102008062136B4 (en) 2008-12-16 2012-05-03 Kamamed Ug Pharmaceutical composition based on peptide of camel milk
MX2011006713A (en) 2008-12-23 2011-07-13 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Salt forms of organic compound.
TW201036975A (en) 2009-01-07 2010-10-16 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Treatment for diabetes in patients with inadequate glycemic control despite metformin therapy
US8706650B2 (en) * 2009-01-14 2014-04-22 Integral Analytics, Inc. Optimization of microgrid energy use and distribution
AR075204A1 (en) 2009-01-29 2011-03-16 Boehringer Ingelheim Int DPP-4 INHIBITORS AND PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS THAT INCLUDE THEM, USEFUL TO TREAT METABOLIC DISEASES IN PEDIATRIC PATIENTS, PARTICULARLY MELLITUS DIABETES TYPE 2
CN102387795A (en) 2009-02-13 2012-03-21 贝林格尔.英格海姆国际有限公司 Antidiabetic medications comprising a dpp-4 inhibitor (linagliptin) optionally in combination with other antidiabetics
MX339194B (en) 2009-02-13 2016-05-16 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Pharmaceutical composition comprising a sglt2 inhibitor, a dpp-iv inhibitor and optionally a further antidiabetic agent and uses thereof.
BRPI1013500A2 (en) * 2009-03-27 2016-04-05 Astrazeneca Uk Ltd methods to prevent major adverse cardiovascular events with dpp-iv inhibitors
EP2412370A4 (en) 2009-03-27 2013-05-22 Kyorin Seiyaku Kk Matrix-type sustained release preparation containing basic additive
EP2417260A1 (en) * 2009-04-08 2012-02-15 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company A genetically stable plasmid expressing pdh and fdh enzymes
CN102459170B (en) 2009-04-09 2014-07-23 桑多斯股份公司 Crystal forms of saxagliptin
WO2010146597A1 (en) 2009-06-18 2010-12-23 Lupin Limited 2-amino-2- [8-(dimethyl carbamoyl)- 8-aza- bicyclo [3.2.1] oct-3-yl]-exo- ethanoyl derivatives as potent dpp-iv inhibitors
AR077642A1 (en) 2009-07-09 2011-09-14 Arena Pharm Inc METABOLISM MODULATORS AND THE TREATMENT OF DISORDERS RELATED TO THE SAME
PL2475428T3 (en) 2009-09-11 2015-12-31 Probiodrug Ag Heterocylcic derivatives as inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase
EP2308847B1 (en) 2009-10-09 2014-04-02 EMC microcollections GmbH Substituted pyridines as inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and their application for the treatment of diabetes and related diseases
PL2498759T3 (en) 2009-11-13 2019-03-29 Astrazeneca Ab Immediate release tablet formulations
DK2498758T3 (en) 2009-11-13 2018-10-15 Astrazeneca Ab TWO-LAYER TABLET FORMULATIONS
EP3345593B1 (en) 2009-11-13 2023-09-06 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland GmbH Pharmaceutical composition comprising despro36exendin-4(1-39)-lys6-nh2 and methionine
EP3417871B1 (en) 2009-11-13 2020-12-23 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland GmbH Pharmaceutical composition comprising a glp-1-agonist, an insulin, and methionine
KR20230021159A (en) 2009-11-27 2023-02-13 베링거 인겔하임 인터내셔날 게엠베하 Treatment of genotyped diabetic patients with dpp-iv inhibitors such as linagliptin
TWI562775B (en) 2010-03-02 2016-12-21 Lexicon Pharmaceuticals Inc Methods of using inhibitors of sodium-glucose cotransporters 1 and 2
EP2542549B1 (en) 2010-03-03 2016-05-11 Probiodrug AG Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase
CA2789440C (en) 2010-03-10 2020-03-24 Probiodrug Ag Heterocyclic inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase (qc, ec 2.3.2.5)
JP2013522279A (en) 2010-03-18 2013-06-13 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Combination of GPR119 agonist and DDP-IV inhibitor linagliptin for use in the treatment of diabetes and related conditions
EP2368874A1 (en) 2010-03-26 2011-09-28 Sandoz AG Racemisation of (R)-N-Boc-3-hydroxyadamant-1-yl glycine
CN102946726B (en) * 2010-04-05 2015-08-19 卡帝拉药物有限公司 Novel blood sugar lowing compound
MX2012011631A (en) 2010-04-06 2013-01-18 Arena Pharm Inc Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto.
WO2011131748A2 (en) 2010-04-21 2011-10-27 Probiodrug Ag Novel inhibitors
CN103140475A (en) * 2010-05-05 2013-06-05 亚细亚化学工业有限公司 Saxagliptin intermediates, saxagliptin polymorphs, and processes for preparation thereof
CN102946875A (en) 2010-05-05 2013-02-27 贝林格尔.英格海姆国际有限公司 Combination therapy
WO2011161161A1 (en) 2010-06-24 2011-12-29 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Diabetes therapy
WO2012017029A1 (en) 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Sandoz Ag Novel salts of saxagrliptin with organic di-acids
WO2012017028A1 (en) 2010-08-06 2012-02-09 Sandoz Ag A novel crystalline compound comprising saxagliptin and phosphoric acid
KR101823320B1 (en) 2010-08-30 2018-01-31 사노피-아벤티스 도이칠란트 게엠베하 Use of ave0010 for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of diabetes mellitus type 2
EP2611770A1 (en) 2010-09-03 2013-07-10 Sandoz AG Process for the reductive amination of -keto carboxylic acids
US20130224296A1 (en) 2010-09-03 2013-08-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Drug Formulations Using Water Soluble Antioxidants
US9616097B2 (en) 2010-09-15 2017-04-11 Synergy Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Formulations of guanylate cyclase C agonists and methods of use
EA201390421A1 (en) 2010-09-22 2013-09-30 Арена Фармасьютикалз, Инк. GPR119 RECEPTOR MODULATORS AND TREATMENT OF RELATED DISORDERS
US20120077778A1 (en) 2010-09-29 2012-03-29 Andrea Bourdelais Ladder-Frame Polyether Conjugates
WO2012047871A1 (en) 2010-10-04 2012-04-12 Assia Chemical Industries Ltd Polymorphs of saxagliptin hydrochloride and processes for preparing them
WO2012061466A2 (en) 2010-11-02 2012-05-10 The General Hospital Corporation Methods for treating steatotic disease
US9034883B2 (en) 2010-11-15 2015-05-19 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Vasoprotective and cardioprotective antidiabetic therapy
TWI631963B (en) 2011-01-05 2018-08-11 雷西肯製藥股份有限公司 Compositions comprising and methods of using inhibitors of sodium-glucose cotransporters 1 and 2
KR101733414B1 (en) 2011-01-31 2017-05-10 카딜라 핼쓰캐어 리미티드 Treatment for lipodystrophy
ES2801725T3 (en) 2011-02-01 2021-01-12 Bristol Myers Squibb Co Pharmaceutical formulations that include an amine compound
US8530670B2 (en) 2011-03-16 2013-09-10 Probiodrug Ag Inhibitors
US20140018371A1 (en) 2011-04-01 2014-01-16 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators Of The GPR119 Receptor And The Treatment Of Disorders Related Thereto
WO2012145361A1 (en) 2011-04-19 2012-10-26 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto
WO2012145604A1 (en) 2011-04-22 2012-10-26 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto
US20140038889A1 (en) 2011-04-22 2014-02-06 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators Of The GPR119 Receptor And The Treatment Of Disorders Related Thereto
US9821032B2 (en) 2011-05-13 2017-11-21 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Pharmaceutical combination for improving glycemic control as add-on therapy to basal insulin
WO2012170702A1 (en) 2011-06-08 2012-12-13 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto
EP2729157B1 (en) 2011-07-06 2019-01-16 The General Hospital Corporation A pentapeptide derived from the c-terminus of glucagon-like peptide 1 (glp-1) for use in treatment
HUE043540T2 (en) 2011-07-15 2019-08-28 Boehringer Ingelheim Int Substituted dimeric quinazoline derivative, its preparation and its use in pharmaceutical compositions for the treatment of type i and ii diabetes
WO2013030160A1 (en) 2011-08-29 2013-03-07 Sanofi-Aventis Deutschland Gmbh Pharmaceutical combination for use in glycemic control in diabetes type 2 patients
AR087744A1 (en) 2011-09-01 2014-04-16 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION FOR USE IN THE TREATMENT OF A NEURODEGENERATIVE DISEASE
WO2013036213A1 (en) 2011-09-07 2013-03-14 Sanovel Ilac Sanayi Ve Ticaret Anonim Sirketi Dpp-iv inhibitor formulations
EP2578208B1 (en) 2011-10-06 2014-05-21 Sanovel Ilac Sanayi ve Ticaret A.S. DPP-IV inhibitor solid dosage formulations
WO2013055910A1 (en) 2011-10-12 2013-04-18 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of the gpr119 receptor and the treatment of disorders related thereto
WO2013081100A1 (en) * 2011-11-30 2013-06-06 積水メディカル株式会社 Adamantyl hydantoin compound
US9115082B2 (en) 2012-01-18 2015-08-25 Catherine Yang Dipeptidyl-peptidase-IV inhibitors for treatment of type 2 diabetes complex with hypertension
US9555001B2 (en) 2012-03-07 2017-01-31 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh Pharmaceutical composition and uses thereof
WO2013160354A1 (en) 2012-04-25 2013-10-31 Enantia, S.L. Crystalline forms of saxagliptin
JP6224084B2 (en) 2012-05-14 2017-11-01 ベーリンガー インゲルハイム インターナショナル ゲゼルシャフト ミット ベシュレンクテル ハフツング Xanthine derivatives as DPP-4 inhibitors for the treatment of glomerular epithelial cell related disorders and / or nephrotic syndrome
US8664443B2 (en) 2012-05-23 2014-03-04 Divi's Laboratories Ltd. Process for the preparation of (1S, 3S, 5S)-2-[2(S)-2-amino-2-(3-hydroxy-1-adamantan-1-yl) acetyl]-2-azabicyclo [3.1.0] hexane-3-carbonitrile
WO2013174767A1 (en) 2012-05-24 2013-11-28 Boehringer Ingelheim International Gmbh A xanthine derivative as dpp -4 inhibitor for use in modifying food intake and regulating food preference
EP2861560B1 (en) 2012-05-24 2018-08-08 Apotex Inc. Salts of saxagliptin with organic acids
CA2879824A1 (en) 2012-07-02 2014-01-09 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Saxagliptin salts
CN103539724B (en) * 2012-07-12 2017-09-26 博瑞生物医药(苏州)股份有限公司 The novel crystal forms and purification process of BMS-477118 single stereoisomers
US9744149B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2017-08-29 Gtx, Inc. Method of treating androgen receptor (AR)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMs)
US9622992B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2017-04-18 Gtx, Inc. Method of treating androgen receptor (AR)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMs)
US9969683B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2018-05-15 Gtx, Inc. Method of treating estrogen receptor (ER)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMS)
US10258596B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2019-04-16 Gtx, Inc. Method of treating HER2-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMS)
US10314807B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2019-06-11 Gtx, Inc. Method of treating HER2-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMS)
US10987334B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2021-04-27 University Of Tennessee Research Foundation Method of treating ER mutant expressing breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulators (SARMs)
US9604916B2 (en) 2012-07-13 2017-03-28 Gtx, Inc. Method of treating androgen receptor (AR)-positive breast cancers with selective androgen receptor modulator (SARMs)
WO2014030051A1 (en) 2012-08-23 2014-02-27 Aurobindo Pharma Limited Stable pharmaceutical compositions comprising saxagliptin
WO2014057495A1 (en) 2012-10-11 2014-04-17 Lee Pharma Limited A process for industrial preparation of [(s)-n-tert butoxycarbonyl-3-hydroxy]adamantylglycine
TWI500613B (en) 2012-10-17 2015-09-21 Cadila Healthcare Ltd Novel heterocyclic compounds
WO2014074668A1 (en) 2012-11-08 2014-05-15 Arena Pharmaceuticals, Inc. Modulators of gpr119 and the treatment of disorders related thereto
SG11201503923XA (en) 2012-11-20 2015-06-29 Lexicon Pharmaceuticals Inc Inhibitors of sodium glucose cotransporter 1
WO2014096983A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Wockhardt Limited Stable pharmaceutical compositions of saxagliptin or salts thereof
WO2014096982A1 (en) 2012-12-21 2014-06-26 Wockhardt Limited Stable pharmaceutical compositions of saxagliptin or salts thereof
WO2014108830A1 (en) 2013-01-10 2014-07-17 Wockhardt Limited A process for preparing pharmaceutically acceptable salt of saxagliptin
ITMI20130132A1 (en) * 2013-01-30 2014-07-31 Laboratorio Chimico Int Spa PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF INTERMEDIATES OF SAXAGLIPTINA SYNTHESIS AND NEW COMPOUNDS
TWI641381B (en) 2013-02-04 2018-11-21 法商賽諾菲公司 Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and/or insulin derivatives
US8652527B1 (en) 2013-03-13 2014-02-18 Upsher-Smith Laboratories, Inc Extended-release topiramate capsules
US9101545B2 (en) 2013-03-15 2015-08-11 Upsher-Smith Laboratories, Inc. Extended-release topiramate capsules
CN104059068B (en) * 2013-03-20 2017-02-08 中国科学院上海药物研究所 Beta-amino-carbonyl compound, preparation method, its pharmaceutical composition and application thereof
CN104098481B (en) * 2013-04-10 2016-05-11 浙江九洲药物科技有限公司 A kind of preparation method of BMS-477118 intermediate
WO2014174524A1 (en) 2013-04-22 2014-10-30 Cadila Healthcare Limited A novel composition for nonalcoholic fatty liver disease (nafld)
WO2014193528A1 (en) * 2013-04-29 2014-12-04 Anovel Pharmaceuticals, Llc Amorphous dosage forms and methods
EP3004053B1 (en) 2013-05-30 2021-03-24 Cadila Healthcare Limited A process for preparation of pyrroles having hypolipidemic hypocholesteremic activities
CN105764916B (en) 2013-06-05 2021-05-18 博士医疗爱尔兰有限公司 Ultra-pure agonists of guanylate cyclase C, methods of making and using the same
TW201513857A (en) 2013-07-05 2015-04-16 Cadila Healthcare Ltd Synergistic compositions
IN2013MU02470A (en) 2013-07-25 2015-06-26 Cadila Healthcare Ltd
EP2832723B1 (en) 2013-07-29 2017-02-15 Zentiva, a.s. Stabilised amorphous forms of Saxagliptin
IN2013MU02813A (en) * 2013-08-28 2015-07-03 Amneal Pharmaceuticals Llc
IN2013MU02905A (en) 2013-09-06 2015-07-03 Cadila Healthcare Ltd
ITMI20131677A1 (en) * 2013-10-10 2015-04-11 Olon Spa PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF SAXAGLIPTINA
AU2014347668A1 (en) 2013-11-05 2016-05-19 Ben-Gurion University Of The Negev Research And Development Authority Compounds for the treatment of diabetes and disease complications arising from same
WO2015067223A1 (en) 2013-11-06 2015-05-14 Zentiva, K., S. L-tartrate salt of (1s,3s,5s)-2-[(2s)-2-amino-2-(3-hydroxytricyclo[3.3.1.13,7]dec-1-yl) acetyl]-2-azabicyclo[3.1.0]hexane-3-carbonitrile and process for preparation thereof
WO2015071887A1 (en) 2013-11-18 2015-05-21 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Oral pharmaceutical compositions of saxagliptin
WO2015071889A1 (en) 2013-11-18 2015-05-21 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Oral compositions of saxagliptin
WO2015087262A1 (en) 2013-12-11 2015-06-18 Ranbaxy Laboratories Limited Process for the preparation of saxagliptin and its intermediates
JP6641280B2 (en) 2014-01-09 2020-02-05 サノフイSanofi Stabilized pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and / or insulin derivatives
JP6735674B2 (en) 2014-01-09 2020-08-05 サノフイSanofi Stabilized pharmaceutical formulation of insulin aspart
WO2015104311A1 (en) 2014-01-09 2015-07-16 Sanofi Stabilized glycerol free pharmaceutical formulations of insulin analogues and/or insulin derivatives
EP3110449B1 (en) 2014-02-28 2023-06-28 Boehringer Ingelheim International GmbH Medical use of a dpp-4 inhibitor
CZ2014177A3 (en) 2014-03-24 2015-10-07 Zentiva, K.S. Process for preparing saxagliptin
US10328082B2 (en) 2014-05-30 2019-06-25 Pfizer Inc. Methods of use and combinations
GB201415598D0 (en) 2014-09-03 2014-10-15 Univ Birmingham Elavated Itercranial Pressure Treatment
CN104557667A (en) * 2014-12-12 2015-04-29 山东省药学科学院 2-cyano pyrrolidine compound, and preparation method and application thereof
ES2949095T3 (en) 2014-12-12 2023-09-25 Sanofi Aventis Deutschland Insulin glargine/lixisenatide fixed ratio formulation
MX2017011586A (en) 2015-03-09 2017-10-26 Intekrin Therapeutics Inc Methods for the treatment of nonalcoholic fatty liver disease and/or lipodystrophy.
TWI748945B (en) 2015-03-13 2021-12-11 德商賽諾菲阿凡提斯德意志有限公司 Treatment type 2 diabetes mellitus patients
TW201705975A (en) 2015-03-18 2017-02-16 賽諾菲阿凡提斯德意志有限公司 Treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus patients
CN105037245B (en) * 2015-08-03 2017-04-12 沧州那瑞化学科技有限公司 Saxagliptin midbody preparing method
WO2017064635A2 (en) 2015-10-14 2017-04-20 Cadila Healthcare Limited Pyrrole compound, compositions and process for preparation thereof
KR101715682B1 (en) 2015-10-29 2017-03-13 경동제약 주식회사 Novel intermediates for preparing saxagliptin, preparing methods thereof and preparing methods of saxagliptin using the same
CN109310697A (en) 2016-06-10 2019-02-05 勃林格殷格翰国际有限公司 The combination of Li Gelieting and melbine
ES2894261T3 (en) 2016-12-09 2022-02-14 Cadila Healthcare Ltd Treatment of primary biliary cholangitis
WO2018162722A1 (en) 2017-03-09 2018-09-13 Deutsches Institut Für Ernährungsforschung Potsdam-Rehbrücke Dpp-4 inhibitors for use in treating bone fractures
CA3058806A1 (en) 2017-04-03 2018-10-11 Coherus Biosciences Inc. Ppar.gamma. agonist for treatment of progressive supranuclear palsy
PL3461819T3 (en) 2017-09-29 2020-11-30 Probiodrug Ag Inhibitors of glutaminyl cyclase
CN109970620B (en) * 2017-12-27 2022-07-12 江苏威凯尔医药科技有限公司 Method for preparing saxagliptin intermediate
EP3807894A1 (en) * 2018-06-14 2021-04-21 AstraZeneca UK Limited Methods for lowering blood sugar with a dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor pharmaceutical composition
WO2020016335A1 (en) 2018-07-19 2020-01-23 Astrazeneca Ab Methods of treating hfpef employing dapagliflozin and compositions comprising the same
MX2021003545A (en) 2018-09-26 2021-05-27 Lexicon Pharmaceuticals Inc Crystalline forms of n-(1 -((2-(dimethylamino)ethyl)amino)-2-m ethyl-1 -oopropan-2-yl)-4-(4-(2-methyl-5- (2s,3r,4r,5s,6r)-3,4,5 -trihydroxy-6-(methylthio)tetrahydro-2h-pyran-2-yl)benzyl) phenl)butanamide and methods of their synthesis.
RU2712097C1 (en) * 2018-09-28 2020-01-24 Общество с ограниченной ответственностью "Необиотек" Dipeptidyl peptidase-4 inhibitor for treating type 2 diabetes mellitus, compounds (versions)
RU2727898C1 (en) * 2020-02-25 2020-07-24 Общество с ограниченной ответственностью «Необиотек» Pharmaceutical composition based on an active substance, an inhibitor of dipeptidyl peptidase-4, for preventing the development and treatment of type 2 diabetes mellitus
US20220023252A1 (en) 2020-07-27 2022-01-27 Astrazeneca Ab Methods of treating chronic kidney disease with dapagliflozin
WO2023275715A1 (en) 2021-06-30 2023-01-05 Pfizer Inc. Metabolites of selective androgen receptor modulators
CN113666846B (en) * 2021-08-31 2023-06-27 济南立德医药技术有限公司 Synthesis method of saxagliptin intermediate
WO2023144722A1 (en) 2022-01-26 2023-08-03 Astrazeneca Ab Dapagliflozin for use in the treatment of prediabetes or reducing the risk of developing type 2 diabetes

Citations (33)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3325478A (en) 1964-11-17 1967-06-13 Du Pont alpha-amino-1-adamantylmethyl penicillins
DE2449840A1 (en) 1973-10-19 1975-04-24 Kao Corp ADAMANTYLAMIDINE AND THE PROCESS FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE
DE2521895A1 (en) 1974-05-16 1976-04-08 Pliva Pharm & Chem Works Alpha-Amino-2-adamantylacetic acid prepn - from 2-adamantylacetic acid via alpha-bromo-2-adamantylacetic acid
EP0007652A1 (en) 1978-06-27 1980-02-06 Shell Internationale Researchmaatschappij B.V. Derivatives of 3-azabicyclo(3.1.0)hexane and a process for their preparation
US4379785A (en) 1979-12-19 1983-04-12 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Heterocyclic substituted sulfonyl ureas, and their use
DE3324263A1 (en) 1983-07-06 1985-01-17 Hoechst Ag, 6230 Frankfurt DERIVATIVES OF 2-AZABICYCLO (3.1.0) HEXAN-3-CARBONIC ACID, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, THEIR SUBSTANCES AND THE USE THEREOF, AND 2-AZABICYCLO (3.1.0) HEXANE DERIVATIVES AS INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS AND PROCESS PRODUCTS
EP0219782A2 (en) 1985-10-15 1987-04-29 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Use of angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors in the treatment of atherosclerosis, thrombosis and peripheral vascular disease
DE3926606A1 (en) 1989-08-11 1991-02-14 Hoechst Ag METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF CARDIALS AND VASCULAR HYPERTROPHY AND HYPERPLASIA
US5462928A (en) 1990-04-14 1995-10-31 New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV
EP0686642A2 (en) 1994-06-10 1995-12-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modified guanidino and amidino thrombin inhibitors
WO1997015576A1 (en) 1995-10-25 1997-05-01 E.I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Herbicidal sulfonamides
WO1997040832A1 (en) 1996-04-25 1997-11-06 Probiodrug Gesellschaft für Arzneimittelforschung mbH Use of dipeptidyl peptidase iv effectors for lowering the blood glucose level in mammals
WO1999026659A1 (en) 1997-11-21 1999-06-03 Pfizer Products Inc. Combination of an aldose reductase inhibitor and a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor
WO1999038501A2 (en) 1998-02-02 1999-08-05 Trustees Of Tufts College Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto
US5939560A (en) 1993-12-03 1999-08-17 Ferring B.V. Inhibitors of DP-mediated processes, compositions and therapeutic methods thereof
WO1999047545A2 (en) 1998-03-19 1999-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of caspases
US5998463A (en) 1998-02-27 1999-12-07 Pfizer Inc Glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors
WO1999067279A1 (en) 1998-06-24 1999-12-29 Probiodrug Gesellschaft für Arzneimittelforschung mbH Compounds of unstable dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors
US6011155A (en) 1996-11-07 2000-01-04 Novartis Ag N-(substituted glycyl)-2-cyanopyrrolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
WO2000010549A1 (en) 1998-08-21 2000-03-02 Point Therapeutics, Inc. Regulation of substrate activity
WO2000047207A1 (en) 1999-02-09 2000-08-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company LACTAM INHIBITORS OF FXa AND METHOD
US6110949A (en) 1999-06-24 2000-08-29 Novartis Ag N-(substituted glycyl)-4-cyanothiazolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
WO2000053171A1 (en) 1999-03-05 2000-09-14 Molteni L. E C. Dei Fratelli Alitti Societa' Di Esercizio S.P.A. Use of metformin in the preparation of pharmaceutical compositions capable of inhibiting the enzyme dipeptidyl peptidase iv
WO2000056296A2 (en) 1999-03-23 2000-09-28 Ferring Bv Compositions for improving fertility
WO2000056297A2 (en) 1999-03-23 2000-09-28 Ferring B.V. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising dipeptidy peptidase iv inhibitors for the promotion of growth
EP1050540A2 (en) 1991-10-22 2000-11-08 New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV
WO2000069868A1 (en) 1999-05-17 2000-11-23 Zaidan Hojin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai Sulphostin analogues and processes for the preparation of sulphostin and analogues thereof
US6166063A (en) 1998-12-10 2000-12-26 Novartis Ag N-(substituted glycyl)-2-cyanopyrrolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
WO2002060894A2 (en) 2001-01-30 2002-08-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Sulfonamide lactam inhibitors of factor xa
WO2003004241A1 (en) 2001-07-07 2003-01-16 Trench Germany Gmbh Method and device for producing an electric insulator made from plastic
US20060287317A1 (en) 2005-06-17 2006-12-21 Apogee Biotechnology Corporation Sphingosine kinase inhibitors
US7205432B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2007-04-17 Kemfine Oy Process for the preparation of adamantane derivatives
US7250529B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2007-07-31 Albemarle Corporation Synthesis process for 2-(3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl)-2-oxoacetic acid

Family Cites Families (56)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3674836A (en) 1968-05-21 1972-07-04 Parke Davis & Co 2,2-dimethyl-{11 -aryloxy-alkanoic acids and salts and esters thereof
US4027009A (en) 1973-06-11 1977-05-31 Merck & Co., Inc. Compositions and methods for depressing blood serum cholesterol
JPS5612114B2 (en) 1974-06-07 1981-03-18
US4183857A (en) 1978-07-06 1980-01-15 Shell Oil Company 3-Benzyl-3-azabicyclo(3.1.0)hexane-2,4-dione
NO154918C (en) 1977-08-27 1987-01-14 Bayer Ag ANALOGUE PROCEDURE FOR THE PREPARATION OF THERAPEUTIC ACTIVE DERIVATIVES OF 3,4,5-TRIHYDROXYPIPERIDINE.
US4231938A (en) 1979-06-15 1980-11-04 Merck & Co., Inc. Hypocholesteremic fermentation products and process of preparation
DK149080C (en) 1980-06-06 1986-07-28 Sankyo Co METHOD FOR PREPARING ML-236B CARBOXYLIC ACID DERIVATIVES
US4450171A (en) 1980-08-05 1984-05-22 Merck & Co., Inc. Antihypercholesterolemic compounds
US4448784A (en) 1982-04-12 1984-05-15 Hoechst-Roussel Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 1-(Aminoalkylphenyl and aminoalkylbenzyl)-indoles and indolines and analgesic method of use thereof
US5354772A (en) 1982-11-22 1994-10-11 Sandoz Pharm. Corp. Indole analogs of mevalonolactone and derivatives thereof
JPS6051189A (en) 1983-08-30 1985-03-22 Sankyo Co Ltd Thiazolidine derivative and its preparation
DE3543999A1 (en) 1985-12-13 1987-06-19 Bayer Ag HIGH PURITY ACARBOSE
US5614492A (en) 1986-05-05 1997-03-25 The General Hospital Corporation Insulinotropic hormone GLP-1 (7-36) and uses thereof
US4681893A (en) 1986-05-30 1987-07-21 Warner-Lambert Company Trans-6-[2-(3- or 4-carboxamido-substituted pyrrol-1-yl)alkyl]-4-hydroxypyran-2-one inhibitors of cholesterol synthesis
US4759923A (en) 1987-06-25 1988-07-26 Hercules Incorporated Process for lowering serum cholesterol using poly(diallylmethylamine) derivatives
JP2569746B2 (en) 1987-08-20 1997-01-08 日産化学工業株式会社 Quinoline mevalonolactones
US4924024A (en) 1988-01-11 1990-05-08 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Phosphorus-containing squalene synthetase inhibitors, new intermediates and method
US4871721A (en) 1988-01-11 1989-10-03 E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Phosphorus-containing squalene synthetase inhibitors
NO177005C (en) 1988-01-20 1995-07-05 Bayer Ag Analogous process for the preparation of substituted pyridines, as well as intermediates for use in the preparation
FI94339C (en) 1989-07-21 1995-08-25 Warner Lambert Co Process for the preparation of pharmaceutically acceptable [R- (R *, R *)] - 2- (4-fluorophenyl) -, - dihydroxy-5- (1-methylethyl) -3-phenyl-4 - [(phenylamino) carbonyl] -1H- for the preparation of pyrrole-1-heptanoic acid and its pharmaceutically acceptable salts
US5177080A (en) 1990-12-14 1993-01-05 Bayer Aktiengesellschaft Substituted pyridyl-dihydroxy-heptenoic acid and its salts
JP2648897B2 (en) 1991-07-01 1997-09-03 塩野義製薬株式会社 Pyrimidine derivatives
US5595872A (en) 1992-03-06 1997-01-21 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Nucleic acids encoding microsomal trigyceride transfer protein
DK36392D0 (en) 1992-03-19 1992-03-19 Novo Nordisk As USE OF CHEMICAL COMPOUND
GB9209628D0 (en) 1992-05-05 1992-06-17 Smithkline Beecham Plc Compounds
US5712396A (en) 1992-10-28 1998-01-27 Magnin; David R. α-phosphonosulfonate squalene synthetase inhibitors
US5594016A (en) 1992-12-28 1997-01-14 Mitsubishi Chemical Corporation Naphthalene derivatives
DE69324504T2 (en) 1993-01-19 1999-08-26 Warner Lambert Co STABILIZED, ORAL COMPOSITION CONTAINING COMPOUND CI-981 AND METHOD
US5346701A (en) 1993-02-22 1994-09-13 Theratech, Inc. Transmucosal delivery of macromolecular drugs
US5739135A (en) 1993-09-03 1998-04-14 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method
US5776983A (en) 1993-12-21 1998-07-07 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Catecholamine surrogates useful as β3 agonists
US5488064A (en) 1994-05-02 1996-01-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Benzo 1,3 dioxole derivatives
US5385929A (en) 1994-05-04 1995-01-31 Warner-Lambert Company [(Hydroxyphenylamino) carbonyl] pyrroles
US5491134A (en) 1994-09-16 1996-02-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Sulfonic, phosphonic or phosphiniic acid β3 agonist derivatives
US5541204A (en) 1994-12-02 1996-07-30 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Aryloxypropanolamine β 3 adrenergic agonists
US5620997A (en) 1995-05-31 1997-04-15 Warner-Lambert Company Isothiazolones
DK0832065T3 (en) 1995-06-06 2001-11-19 Pfizer Substituted N- (indole-2-carbonyl) glycinamides and derivatives as glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors
DK0832066T3 (en) 1995-06-06 2001-11-19 Pfizer Substituted N- (indole-2-carbonyl) amides and derivatives as glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors
AU6966696A (en) 1995-10-05 1997-04-28 Warner-Lambert Company Method for treating and preventing inflammation and atherosclerosis
AU717743B2 (en) 1995-12-13 2000-03-30 Regents Of The University Of California, The Nuclear receptor ligands and ligand binding domains
US5770615A (en) 1996-04-04 1998-06-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Catecholamine surrogates useful as β3 agonists
US5962440A (en) 1996-05-09 1999-10-05 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Cyclic phosphonate ester inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method
US5885983A (en) 1996-05-10 1999-03-23 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method
US5827875A (en) 1996-05-10 1998-10-27 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method
HRP970330B1 (en) 1996-07-08 2004-06-30 Bayer Ag Cycloalkano pyridines
TW492957B (en) * 1996-11-07 2002-07-01 Novartis Ag N-substituted 2-cyanopyrrolidnes
US5952322A (en) 1996-12-05 1999-09-14 Pfizer Inc. Method of reducing tissue damage associated with non-cardiac ischemia using glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors
US5760246A (en) 1996-12-17 1998-06-02 Biller; Scott A. Conformationally restricted aromatic inhibitors of microsomal triglyceride transfer protein and method
GB9713739D0 (en) 1997-06-27 1997-09-03 Karobio Ab Thyroid receptor ligands
DE19742601A1 (en) * 1997-09-26 1999-04-29 Siemens Ag Method and device for generating frames around video images
DE69922930T2 (en) 1998-02-27 2005-12-29 Pfizer Products Inc., Groton N - [(SUBSTITUTED FIVE-GLASS DI OR TRIAZA DOUBLE-SATURATED RING) CARBONYL] GUANIDINE DERIVATIVES FOR THE TREATMENT OF ISCHEMISTRY
EP0978279A1 (en) 1998-08-07 2000-02-09 Pfizer Products Inc. Inhibitors of human glycogen phosphorylase
WO2000038722A1 (en) 1998-12-23 2000-07-06 G.D. Searle & Co. COMBINATIONS OF CHOLESTERYL ESTER TRANSFER PROTEIN INHIBITORS AND HMG CoA REDUCTASE INHIBITORS FOR CARDIOVASCULAR INDICATIONS
JP2002536410A (en) 1999-02-12 2002-10-29 ノボ ノルディスク アクティーゼルスカブ Use of a pyrrolidine derivative in the manufacture of a pharmaceutical composition for treating or preventing obesity or regulating appetite
EP1041068B1 (en) 1999-04-01 2004-04-14 Pfizer Products Inc. Compounds for treating and preventing diabetic complications
US6395767B2 (en) * 2000-03-10 2002-05-28 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Patent Citations (43)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US3325478A (en) 1964-11-17 1967-06-13 Du Pont alpha-amino-1-adamantylmethyl penicillins
DE2449840A1 (en) 1973-10-19 1975-04-24 Kao Corp ADAMANTYLAMIDINE AND THE PROCESS FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE
US3906044A (en) 1973-10-19 1975-09-16 Kao Corp Adamantylamidines and processes for making them
DE2521895A1 (en) 1974-05-16 1976-04-08 Pliva Pharm & Chem Works Alpha-Amino-2-adamantylacetic acid prepn - from 2-adamantylacetic acid via alpha-bromo-2-adamantylacetic acid
EP0007652A1 (en) 1978-06-27 1980-02-06 Shell Internationale Researchmaatschappij B.V. Derivatives of 3-azabicyclo(3.1.0)hexane and a process for their preparation
US4254057A (en) 1978-06-27 1981-03-03 Shell Oil Company 2-Aminomethylcyclopropyl-1,1-dialkylacetals
US4255334A (en) 1978-06-27 1981-03-10 Shell Oil Company Process for preparing 3-azabicyclo(3.1.0)hexane-2-carboxylic acid
US4379785A (en) 1979-12-19 1983-04-12 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Heterocyclic substituted sulfonyl ureas, and their use
DE3324263A1 (en) 1983-07-06 1985-01-17 Hoechst Ag, 6230 Frankfurt DERIVATIVES OF 2-AZABICYCLO (3.1.0) HEXAN-3-CARBONIC ACID, METHOD FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF, THEIR SUBSTANCES AND THE USE THEREOF, AND 2-AZABICYCLO (3.1.0) HEXANE DERIVATIVES AS INTERMEDIATE PRODUCTS AND PROCESS PRODUCTS
EP0219782A2 (en) 1985-10-15 1987-04-29 Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft Use of angiotensin-converting enzyme inhibitors in the treatment of atherosclerosis, thrombosis and peripheral vascular disease
DE3926606A1 (en) 1989-08-11 1991-02-14 Hoechst Ag METHOD FOR THE TREATMENT OF CARDIALS AND VASCULAR HYPERTROPHY AND HYPERPLASIA
US5462928A (en) 1990-04-14 1995-10-31 New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV
EP1050540A2 (en) 1991-10-22 2000-11-08 New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. Inhibitors of dipeptidyl-aminopeptidase type IV
US5939560A (en) 1993-12-03 1999-08-17 Ferring B.V. Inhibitors of DP-mediated processes, compositions and therapeutic methods thereof
EP0686642A2 (en) 1994-06-10 1995-12-13 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modified guanidino and amidino thrombin inhibitors
US5561146A (en) 1994-06-10 1996-10-01 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Modified guanidino and amidino thrombin inhibitors
WO1997015576A1 (en) 1995-10-25 1997-05-01 E.I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Herbicidal sulfonamides
US6060432A (en) 1995-10-25 2000-05-09 E. I. Du Pont De Nemours And Company Herbicidal sulfonamides
WO1997040832A1 (en) 1996-04-25 1997-11-06 Probiodrug Gesellschaft für Arzneimittelforschung mbH Use of dipeptidyl peptidase iv effectors for lowering the blood glucose level in mammals
US6011155A (en) 1996-11-07 2000-01-04 Novartis Ag N-(substituted glycyl)-2-cyanopyrrolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
WO1999026659A1 (en) 1997-11-21 1999-06-03 Pfizer Products Inc. Combination of an aldose reductase inhibitor and a glycogen phosphorylase inhibitor
US6803357B1 (en) 1998-02-02 2004-10-12 New England Medical Center Hospitals, Inc. Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto
WO1999038501A2 (en) 1998-02-02 1999-08-05 Trustees Of Tufts College Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto
US6890898B2 (en) 1998-02-02 2005-05-10 Trustees Of Tufts College Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto
US7078381B2 (en) 1998-02-02 2006-07-18 Trustees Of Tufts College Method of regulating glucose metabolism, and reagents related thereto
US5998463A (en) 1998-02-27 1999-12-07 Pfizer Inc Glycogen phosphorylase inhibitors
WO1999047545A2 (en) 1998-03-19 1999-09-23 Vertex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated Inhibitors of caspases
WO1999067279A1 (en) 1998-06-24 1999-12-29 Probiodrug Gesellschaft für Arzneimittelforschung mbH Compounds of unstable dipeptidyl peptidase iv inhibitors
WO2000010549A1 (en) 1998-08-21 2000-03-02 Point Therapeutics, Inc. Regulation of substrate activity
US6166063A (en) 1998-12-10 2000-12-26 Novartis Ag N-(substituted glycyl)-2-cyanopyrrolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
WO2000047207A1 (en) 1999-02-09 2000-08-17 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company LACTAM INHIBITORS OF FXa AND METHOD
US6297233B1 (en) 1999-02-09 2001-10-02 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Lactam inhibitors of FXa and method
WO2000053171A1 (en) 1999-03-05 2000-09-14 Molteni L. E C. Dei Fratelli Alitti Societa' Di Esercizio S.P.A. Use of metformin in the preparation of pharmaceutical compositions capable of inhibiting the enzyme dipeptidyl peptidase iv
WO2000056297A2 (en) 1999-03-23 2000-09-28 Ferring B.V. Pharmaceutical compositions comprising dipeptidy peptidase iv inhibitors for the promotion of growth
WO2000056296A2 (en) 1999-03-23 2000-09-28 Ferring Bv Compositions for improving fertility
WO2000069868A1 (en) 1999-05-17 2000-11-23 Zaidan Hojin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai Sulphostin analogues and processes for the preparation of sulphostin and analogues thereof
US6110949A (en) 1999-06-24 2000-08-29 Novartis Ag N-(substituted glycyl)-4-cyanothiazolidines, pharmaceutical compositions containing them and their use in inhibiting dipeptidyl peptidase-IV
WO2002060894A2 (en) 2001-01-30 2002-08-08 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Sulfonamide lactam inhibitors of factor xa
US6555542B1 (en) 2001-01-30 2003-04-29 Bristol-Myers Squibb Company Sulfonamide lactam inhibitors of FXa and method
WO2003004241A1 (en) 2001-07-07 2003-01-16 Trench Germany Gmbh Method and device for producing an electric insulator made from plastic
US7250529B2 (en) 2004-09-17 2007-07-31 Albemarle Corporation Synthesis process for 2-(3-hydroxy-1-adamantyl)-2-oxoacetic acid
US7205432B2 (en) 2005-05-31 2007-04-17 Kemfine Oy Process for the preparation of adamantane derivatives
US20060287317A1 (en) 2005-06-17 2006-12-21 Apogee Biotechnology Corporation Sphingosine kinase inhibitors

Non-Patent Citations (28)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
Asai, Y. et al, The Journal of Antibiotics, vol. 50, No. 8, pp. 653-657, Aug. 1997.
Ashworth, D.M. et al, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letter, vol. 6, No. 10, pp. 1163-1166, 1996.
Ashworth, D.M. et al, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letter, vol. 6, No. 22, pp. 2745-2748, 1996.
Augustyns, KJL et al, Eur. J. Med. Chem. 32, 301-309, (1997).
Belyaev, A. et al, J. Med. Chem., 42, 1041-1052, 1999.
David J. Augeri et al., "Discovery and Preclinical Profile of Saxagliptin (BMS-477118): A Highly Potent, Long-Acting, Orally Active Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV Inhibitor for the Treatment of Type 2 Diabetes," J. Med. Chem. 2005, 48, 5025-5037.
David R. Magnin et al. "Synthesis of Novel Potent Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV Inhibitors with Enhanced Chemical Stability: Interplay Between the N-Terminal Amino Acid Alkyl Side Chain and the Cyclopropyl Group of alpha-Aminoacyl-L-cis-4,5-methanoloprolinenitrile-Based Inhibitors," J. Med. Chem. 2004, 47, 2587-2598.
David R. Magnin et al. "Synthesis of Novel Potent Dipeptidyl Peptidase IV Inhibitors with Enhanced Chemical Stability: Interplay Between the N-Terminal Amino Acid Alkyl Side Chain and the Cyclopropyl Group of α-Aminoacyl-L-cis-4,5-methanoloprolinenitrile-Based Inhibitors," J. Med. Chem. 2004, 47, 2587-2598.
Demuth, H.-U. et al, Diabetes, 2000, vol. 49, suppl. 1,A102.
Demuth, H.-U. et al, FEBS Letters, vol. 320, No. 1, pp. 23-27, Mar. 1993.
Hanessian, S. et al, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chem. Letters, vol. 8, No. 16, pp. 2123-2128, Aug. 18, 1998.
Hermann Stetter and Elli Rauscher, Zur Kenntnis der Adamantan-carbonsaure-(1) Chemische Berichte, 1960, vol. 93, No. 5, pp. 1161-1166.
Hiltmann, Arzneim.-Forsch. 24 (4) 548-600 1974 Abstract only. *
Hughes, T.E. et al, Biochemistry, 28, 11597-11603, 19993.
Lambeir, A.-M., et al, Biochimica et Biophysica Acts, 1290, pp. 76-82 (1996).
Li, J. et al, Archives of Biochemistry and Biophysics, vol. 323, No. 1, pp. 148-154, Oct. 20, 1995.
Lin, J. et al, Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci, USA, vol. 95, pp. 14020-14024, Nov. 1998.
Ohnuki, T. et al, Drugs of the Future, 24(6):665-670, 1999.
Peter Beak et al.,"Intramolecular Cyclizations of alpha-Lithioamine Synthetic Equivalents: Convenient Synthesis of 3-, 5-, and 6-Membered Ring Heterocyclic Nitrogen Compounds and Elaborations of 3-Mimbered Ring Systems," J. Org. Chem. vol. 59, No. 2. 1994, pp. 276-277.
Rotherberg, P. et al, Diabetes, 2000, vol. 49, Suppl. 1, A39.
Sagnard, I. et al, Tetrahedron Letters, vol. 36, No. 18, pp. 3149-3152, 1995.
Stockel, A. et al, Peptides: Chemistry, Structure and Biology, pp. 709-710, 1996.
Tanaka, S. et al, Immunopharmacology 40, 21-26 (1998).
Tverezovsky, V. V. et al., Tetrahedron, vol. 53, No. 43, pp. 14773-14792, 1997.
Von R. Hiltmann et al., "2-Acylaminopyridin-Derivate mit morphinagonistischer und antagonisterischer Wirksamkeit, Arzneimittel-Forschung," 1974, vol. 24, No. 4a, pp. 584-600.
Yamada, M. et al, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letter 8, 1537-1540 (1998).
Yamada, M. et al, Bioorganic & Medicinal Chemistry Letters 8, 1537-1540 (1998).
Yoshimoto, T. et al, Agric. Biol. Chem., 55(4), pp. 1135-1136, 1991.

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2016016770A1 (en) 2014-07-26 2016-02-04 Wockhardt Limited A novel modified release pharmaceutical composition of sitagliptin or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CZ307821B6 (en) 2019-05-29
US20020019411A1 (en) 2002-02-14
CZ304355B6 (en) 2014-03-26
CA2402894A1 (en) 2001-09-20
LU91650I2 (en) 2010-04-19
NO2010006I1 (en) 2010-05-03
BR0109115B1 (en) 2015-01-06
JP2014040486A (en) 2014-03-06
JP2013040219A (en) 2013-02-28
EP2272825A3 (en) 2011-05-04
HK1152516A1 (en) 2012-03-02
HK1049330B (en) 2008-11-14
MXPA02008837A (en) 2003-04-25
LU91985I2 (en) 2012-06-25
NO2010006I2 (en) 2011-02-14
NO324227B1 (en) 2007-09-10
DE122012000023I1 (en) 2012-08-09
JP2015134830A (en) 2015-07-27
ATE396176T1 (en) 2008-06-15
HUS1200031I1 (en) 2017-08-28
CN1698601A (en) 2005-11-23
ZA200206816B (en) 2003-11-26
EP2272825A2 (en) 2011-01-12
HUP0302792A3 (en) 2007-03-28
UY34691A (en) 2014-10-31
FR10C0010I2 (en) 2011-04-01
HU228110B1 (en) 2012-11-28
EP1559710B1 (en) 2014-02-26
IL177018A0 (en) 2009-02-11
CO5280198A1 (en) 2003-05-30
CA2402894C (en) 2012-04-17
AR027634A1 (en) 2003-04-02
EP1261586B1 (en) 2008-05-21
JP2010077163A (en) 2010-04-08
EP1261586A2 (en) 2002-12-04
NO2012009I1 (en) 2012-06-04
BRPI0109115B8 (en) 2021-05-25
BR0109115A (en) 2003-12-30
CN1213028C (en) 2005-08-03
FR10C0010I1 (en) 2010-03-26
PL365520A1 (en) 2005-01-10
AU4546601A (en) 2001-09-24
KR20030036140A (en) 2003-05-09
HK1049330A1 (en) 2003-05-09
JP5427047B2 (en) 2014-02-26
CY2010005I2 (en) 2012-01-25
EP1559710A2 (en) 2005-08-03
US6395767B2 (en) 2002-05-28
ES2553573T3 (en) 2015-12-10
PE20020771A1 (en) 2002-09-06
IL177019A (en) 2013-02-28
KR100758407B1 (en) 2007-09-14
HUP0302792A2 (en) 2003-12-29
CY1108273T1 (en) 2012-01-25
CY2010005I1 (en) 2012-01-25
ES2305062T3 (en) 2008-11-01
MY124512A (en) 2006-06-30
DE122010000008I1 (en) 2010-07-01
HUS1200030I1 (en) 2016-10-28
ES2768961T3 (en) 2020-06-24
ES2456667T3 (en) 2014-04-23
NO20024295L (en) 2002-11-06
TW200624420A (en) 2006-07-16
IL177019A0 (en) 2006-12-10
KR20060026125A (en) 2006-03-22
NO20024295D0 (en) 2002-09-09
IL151372A (en) 2009-12-24
DK1261586T3 (en) 2008-09-29
RU2002125491A (en) 2004-01-10
CZ307784B6 (en) 2019-05-02
JP2003531118A (en) 2003-10-21
LU91650I9 (en) 2019-01-03
EG25854A (en) 2012-09-11
DE60134122D1 (en) 2008-07-03
WO2001068603A3 (en) 2002-02-14
AU2001245466B2 (en) 2005-05-12
CY2012009I1 (en) 2015-08-05
PL207041B1 (en) 2010-10-29
CN1427826A (en) 2003-07-02
CY2012009I2 (en) 2015-08-05
TWI258468B (en) 2006-07-21
NZ520821A (en) 2004-11-26
UY26613A1 (en) 2001-10-25
IL151372A0 (en) 2003-04-10
NL300436I1 (en) 2010-04-01
EP1559710A3 (en) 2009-07-22
PT1261586E (en) 2008-08-04
BE2010C008I2 (en) 2020-01-30
EP2995615B1 (en) 2019-12-18
WO2001068603A2 (en) 2001-09-20
JP5951843B2 (en) 2016-07-13
JP5953292B2 (en) 2016-07-20
EP2995615A1 (en) 2016-03-16
BE2012C016I2 (en) 2020-01-30
JP4460205B2 (en) 2010-05-12
HU230380B1 (en) 2016-03-29
RU2286986C2 (en) 2006-11-10
KR100754089B1 (en) 2007-08-31
EP2272825B1 (en) 2015-11-04
SG152030A1 (en) 2009-05-29
HU230347B1 (en) 2016-02-29
NO2012009I2 (en) 2014-06-02

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
USRE44186E1 (en) Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method
US6573287B2 (en) 2,1-oxazoline and 1,2-pyrazoline-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method
AU2001245466A1 (en) Cyclopropyl-fused pyrrolidine-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl IV, processes for their preparation, and their use
US6995180B2 (en) Glycinenitrile-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and methods
AU2002254557A1 (en) 2,1-Oxazoline and 1,2-pyrazoline-based inhibitors of dipeptidyl peptidase IV and method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
CC Certificate of correction
FPAY Fee payment

Year of fee payment: 12

AS Assignment

Owner name: ASTRAZENECA AB, SWEDEN

Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:BRISTOL-MYERS SQUIBB COMPANY;REEL/FRAME:032541/0698

Effective date: 20140201

AS Assignment

Owner name: ASTRAZENECA AB, SWEDEN

Free format text: CORRECTIVE ASSIGNMENT TO CORRECT THE ADDRESS PREVIOUSLY RECORDED ON REEL 032541 FRAME 0698. ASSIGNOR(S) HEREBY CONFIRMS THE ADDRESS OF THE ASSIGNEE SHOULD BE SE-151 85, SODERTALJE, SWEDEN;ASSIGNOR:BRISTOL-MYERS SQUIBB COMPANY;REEL/FRAME:032858/0978

Effective date: 20140201

IPR Aia trial proceeding filed before the patent and appeal board: inter partes review

Free format text: TRIAL NO: IPR2015-01340

Opponent name: MYLAN PHARMACEUTICALS INC.

Effective date: 20150604

IPR Aia trial proceeding filed before the patent and appeal board: inter partes review

Free format text: TRIAL NO: IPR2016-01029

Opponent name: WOCKHARDT BIO AG,WOCKHARDT LIMITED,WOCKHARDT USA L

Effective date: 20160511

IPR Aia trial proceeding filed before the patent and appeal board: inter partes review

Free format text: TRIAL NO: IPR2016-01122

Opponent name: TEVA PHARMACEUTICALS USA INC. ANDTEVA PHARMACEUTIC

Effective date: 20160601

Free format text: TRIAL NO: IPR2016-01104

Opponent name: AMNEAL PHARMACEUTICALS LLC,AMNEAL PHARMACEUTICALS

Effective date: 20160601

Free format text: TRIAL NO: IPR2016-01117

Opponent name: AUROBINDO PHARMA U.S.A., INC. ANDAUROBINDO PHARMA,

Effective date: 20160602

IPRC Trial and appeal board: inter partes review certificate

Kind code of ref document: K1

Free format text: INTER PARTES REVIEW CERTIFICATE; TRIAL NO. IPR2015-01340, JUN. 4, 2015; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01029, MAY 11, 2016; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01122, JUN. 1, 2016; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01117, JUN. 2, 2016; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01104, JUN. 3, 2016 INTER PARTES REVIEW CERTIFICATE FOR PATENT RE44,186, ISSUED APR. 30, 2013, APPL. NO. 13/308,658, DEC. 1, 2011 INTER PARTES REVIEW CERTIFICATE ISSUED JUN. 21, 2019

Effective date: 20190621

IPRC Trial and appeal board: inter partes review certificate

Kind code of ref document: K1

Free format text: INTER PARTES REVIEW CERTIFICATE; TRIAL NO. IPR2015-01340, JUN. 4, 2015; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01029, MAY 11, 2016; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01122, JUN. 1, 2016; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01117, JUN. 2, 2016; TRIAL NO. IPR2016-01104, JUN. 3, 2016 INTER PARTES REVIEW CERTIFICATE FOR PATENT RE44,186, ISSUED APR. 30, 2013, APPL. NO. 13/308,658, DEC. 1, 2011 INTER PARTES REVIEW CERTIFICATE ISSUED JUN. 21, 2019

Effective date: 20190621